n w w

w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
-li .u .c w w ft w
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f w p n w

i
li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f n w
LIFT

Revision 0
w p

12/09/2013
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w n w
-li .u

V4.3.A7A
ft w
ENGLISH

.u .c p-
n w li .u .c w
p-
p- w ft w p n w lif
li .u .c w .u t.c
ft w n w
-li
f n
USER MANUAL

VEG2000
.u .c p-
n w li .u t.c w
p-

V4.3.107A
p- w ft w p n w lif
li .u .c
n w -li .u t.c
ft w w f n
CONTROL BOARD
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
.u .c w w ft w
w n w
-li
f .u .c w
w
p- t.c w p n
w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
-li .u .c w w ft w
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f w p n w

i
li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .c
Rev 1.0

w n w
-li
f .u n w
w p
LAYOUT

w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.u .c w
p-
.u t.c w p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n
w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
lif
SUMMARY

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
1. FAULT MESSAGES ................................................................. 1
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w
1.1 Description .................................................................................... 1

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

1.2 Fault Classification ......................................................................... 1

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
1.3
w
Fault Reading ................................................................................ 1
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
1.4 Fault List Total Clearing .................................................................. 1

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w
1.5 Fault List ....................................................................................... 2

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

1.6 Immediate Information .................................................................. 3

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
2. BOARD PROGRAMMING ........................................................ 4
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

2.1 “Programmable Function” Table ...................................................... 4

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li

2.2 “Programmable Times” Table .......................................................... 6

w

w
w
w

f
n

2.3 “Programmable Parameters” Table .................................................. 7

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
2.4 Defaults Tables .............................................................................. 9
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

2.4.1 Default “Functions Table” ...................................................................................... 9

t.c

w
w
w

f
n

2.4.2 Default “Times Table” ........................................................................................... 9

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
2.4.3 Default “Parameters Table” ................................................................................. 10

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
2.5 Programmable Inputs/Outputs (0/23)............................................ 11

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
2.5.1 Programmable I/O (0-23) .................................................................................... 11
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

3. Multifunction Keypad DISP900 ............................................. 13

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

3.1 Multifunction Keypad Components ................................................ 14

w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
3.1.1 PRESET Switch ................................................................................................... 14

p
w

ft
w

.u
3.1.2 DATA Push-Button .............................................................................................. 14
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

3.1.3 SPEEDY Push-Button ........................................................................................... 14

w

ft

w
.u

.c

3.1.4 UP Push-Button .................................................................................................. 14

li
w

w
p-

ft
w

3.1.5 DOWN Push-Button ............................................................................................ 14

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
3.2 System’s Operative Modes Overview ............................................. 15
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

3.2.1 Start-Up ............................................................................................................. 16

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

3.2.2 Running Mode .................................................................................................... 16

w
ift

li
w
.u

3.2.3 Programming Mode............................................................................................. 17

.c

p-
w
w

ft

3.2.4 Inspection Mode ................................................................................................. 18

n

.u

.c
li
w

3.2.5 Alarm Mode........................................................................................................ 18

.c

p-

ft
w
ft

3.2.6 Input State Check ............................................................................................... 19

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

3.3 PROGRAMMING WRITING PROTECTION THROUGH

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

PASSWORD .......................................................................................... 20
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

3.4 Programming by pc ...................................................................... 21

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

4. CONTROL BOARD CHARACTERISTICS .................................. 22

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

4.1 General Characteristics ................................................................. 22

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

4.2 Electric Characteristics .................................................................. 22

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-

4.2.1 Power Supplies ................................................................................................... 22

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

i
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
4.2.2 Inputs................................................................................................................ 22

t
lif
n

w
.u
4.2.3 Outputs ............................................................................................................. 22

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft
4.3 Electrical Drawing ........................................................................ 23

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
5. WIRINGS DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 24

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
5.1 0 – 23 ......................................................................................... 24
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
5.2 A/B/C/D....................................................................................... 24

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

5.3 AL-/ AL+/ AR/ RES/ SA/ SAR ........................................................ 24

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
5.4 ALT ............................................................................................. 24

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
5.5 AP/CP/CRP .................................................................................. 24
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
5.6 AP2 ............................................................................................. 24

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
5.7
w
APA ............................................................................................. 24
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
5.8 APG............................................................................................. 25

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
5.9 AUX1/AUX2/AUX3 ........................................................................ 25
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

5.10 BAT ............................................................................................. 25

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
5.11 CCO /CCC/ CCS ............................................................................ 25

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
5.12 CL ............................................................................................... 25
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
5.13 KE/ KI/ DEX/DIN .......................................................................... 25

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

5.14 CM1/CM2..................................................................................... 25
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
5.14.1 w
CM1 ............................................................................................................... 25
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
5.15 CPF ............................................................................................. 26

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

5.16 CPP ............................................................................................. 26

t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

5.17 CS ............................................................................................... 26
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

5.18 CS1 ............................................................................................. 26

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
5.19 CT ............................................................................................... 27
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

5.20 EM .............................................................................................. 27
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
5.21 EXC ............................................................................................. 27
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

5.22 FD/FS .......................................................................................... 27

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
5.23 FS3 ............................................................................................. 27
p-

ft
w

li
w

5.24 GND ............................................................................................ 27

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

5.25 GN .............................................................................................. 27 w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

5.26 ICV/IF ......................................................................................... 27

w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

5.27 INT ............................................................................................. 28

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

5.28 MAN ............................................................................................ 28

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

5.29 OCC ............................................................................................ 28

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

5.30 OM .............................................................................................. 28
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

5.31 PAP ............................................................................................. 28

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

5.32 PAT ............................................................................................. 29

.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

5.33 PCP ............................................................................................. 29

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

5.34 PDM/PSM .................................................................................... 29

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c

5.35 RD/RS ......................................................................................... 29

li
w

w
p-

ft
w

5.36 RU .............................................................................................. 29
n

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

ii
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
5.37 SCP ............................................................................................. 29

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c
5.38 SNR ............................................................................................ 30

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
5.39 TD/TS ......................................................................................... 30

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
5.40 TG .............................................................................................. 30

-li
w
.u

.c
5.40.1 TG Delay ....................................................................................................... 30

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
5.41 TM .............................................................................................. 30

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

5.42 TO .............................................................................................. 30

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
5.43 TP ............................................................................................... 30

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

5.43.1 TP Delay ........................................................................................................ 30

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
5.44 TSD............................................................................................. 30

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
5.45 VIM ............................................................................................. 31
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

5.46 LED Signalling .............................................................................. 31

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

5.46.1 Led PWR ........................................................................................................ 31

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
5.46.2 Led Fault ........................................................................................................ 31
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

5.46.3 Led Err ........................................................................................................... 31

t.c

w
w

p
w

5.46.4 Led Ready ...................................................................................................... 31

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
6. ARCHITECT System’S SPECIFICATION ................................ 32
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
6.1 Door Pre-Opening ........................................................................ 32
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
6.2 Starting y/ ................................................................................. 32
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

6.3 Battery ........................................................................................ 32

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

6.4 Serial or Parallel Wiring ................................................................ 33

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
6.5 Landing and Slowing Down Zone ’s Magnetic Sensors Layout ........ 33
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

6.6 Enlarged Slowing Down Zone and Non-Regular Floor Distances ...... 35
w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
6.7 Delayed Stopping ......................................................................... 40
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
6.8 Photocells and Safety Reopening System ....................................... 40
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
6.9 Gong ........................................................................................... 40

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

6.10 Law ‘13’ Operation ....................................................................... 40

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

6.11 Immediate Starting ...................................................................... 40 w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

6.12 Retiring Cam ................................................................................ 40

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

6.13 Doors .......................................................................................... 40

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c

6.13.1 Door Checking ................................................................................................ 41

li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

6.13.2 Door Opening Exclusion During Testing Operation ............................................. 41

ift

li
w
.u

.c

6.13.3 Manual Doors ................................................................................................. 41

p-
w
w

ft

6.13.4 Automatic Doors ............................................................................................. 42

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

6.13.5 Semi-Automatic Doors ..................................................................................... 42

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w

6.13.6 Multi-Entrances ............................................................................................... 42

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

6.13.7 OPERATOR ON During Run ............................................................................. 43

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

6.14 Limit Switch Test.......................................................................... 43

.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

6.15 Parking ........................................................................................ 43

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

6.15.1 Parking Operation ........................................................................................... 43

ft
n

.u
li
w

6.15.2 Parking With Open or Close Doors .................................................................... 43

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

6.16 Timers ......................................................................................... 43

n

w
.u

.c
li
w

6.17 Plant Types: Single Automatic Push Button (Single Call), Collective or
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

Duplex Plant ......................................................................................... 44

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

iii
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
6.17.1 Single Automatic Push Button Plant (Single Call) ................................................ 44

t
lif
n

w
.u
6.17.2 Down Collective Plant ...................................................................................... 44

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft
6.17.3 Up / Down Collective ....................................................................................... 44

w
.u

.c
-li
w
6.17.4 Duplex Plant ................................................................................................... 44

w
w

ft
w

n
6.17.5 Duplo ............................................................................................................. 45

-li
w
.u

.c
6.17.6 Multiplex Plant ................................................................................................ 45

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
6.18 Inverter / Electronic Unit Management .......................................... 45

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
6.19 Speed.......................................................................................... 45
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
6.19.1 One Speed ..................................................................................................... 45

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
6.19.2 Two Speeds .................................................................................................... 45

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
6.19.3 Three Speeds ................................................................................................. 45

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
7. CONTROLS ......................................................................... 46
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
7.1 Safety Circuit ............................................................................... 46
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

7.2 Re-Opening Devices ..................................................................... 46

p
w
w

f
n

.u
7.3 Maximum Travel .......................................................................... 46

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

7.4 Run Direction ............................................................................... 47

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
7.5 Movable Platform ......................................................................... 47
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

7.6 Engine Temperature ..................................................................... 47

t.c

p
w

n
7.7 Doors Zone .................................................................................. 48
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

8. SIGNALLING ....................................................................... 49
t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
8.1 Position /Arrival /Reservation ........................................................ 49

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

8.1.1 Position Signalling ............................................................................................... 49

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

8.1.2 Underground Floors ............................................................................................ 51

w

p
w
p

8.1.3 Arrival Signalling ................................................................................................. 51

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
8.1.4 Reservation Signalling ......................................................................................... 51
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

8.2 Direction...................................................................................... 51
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

8.2.1 Next arrow direction ........................................................................................... 51

p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

8.3 Car Lighting ................................................................................. 53

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

8.4 Lights .......................................................................................... 53

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

8.5 Reserved Signal ........................................................................... 53

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
8.6 Skipping The Floor Indication on Serial Display .............................. 54
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

9. OPERATIONS ...................................................................... 55
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

9.1 Automatic Relevelling ................................................................... 55

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

9.2 Emergency Service Mode .............................................................. 55

.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w

9.2.1 Emergency Service Mode in Hydraulic Plant .......................................................... 55

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

9.2.2 Emergency Service Mode in Rope Plant ................................................................ 55

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

9.3 Platform Management .................................................................. 56

.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

9.3.1 Electric Platforms ................................................................................................ 56

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

9.4 Reduced Headroom and pit managment. ....................................... 57

p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

9.5 Priority Call .................................................................................. 57

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

9.6 Internal Mode .............................................................................. 58

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

9.7 Mounting Operation ..................................................................... 58

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-

9.8 Inspection Service Mode ............................................................... 58

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

iv
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
9.8.1 Hand operation................................................................................................... 59

t
lif
n

w
.u
9.9 Syncronizing/Phasing ................................................................... 59

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
9.10 Fire Service.................................................................................. 59

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
9.10.1 Fire Service Mode ............................................................................................ 59
w

-li
w
.u
9.10.2 Firefighters Service Mode (EN 81-70) ................................................................ 59

.c

p
w

ft

n
Amendament A3 ................................................................................... 60
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
10. SERIAL Expansions .......................................................... 63

.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

10.1 Wirings ........................................................................................ 63

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
Serial Display.................................................................................................................. 64
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
10.2 Car’s Serials (VEG400, SERCAR_LCD) ............................................ 64

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

10.2.1 Serial Board ITF400......................................................................................... 65

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

..................................................................................................................................... 65

w
w

p
w

w
f

10.2.2 SERCAR_LCD .................................................................................................. 69

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
10.2.3 Using Two Car’s Serial Board ............................................................................ 72
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

10.3 Serial Board for External Calls ....................................................... 76

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
10.3.1 Floors’ Serial boards (VEG602, VEG701, FLOORDIS, VEG800,

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
ITF800,LCD600,LCD601) ................................................................................................. 76
w
w

f
n

-li
10.3.2 w
Collecting external calls with VEG400 ................................................................ 81
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

v
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
1.
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c
FAULT MESSAGES

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
1.1DESCRIPTION

.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
System fault will be shown with its own blinking code on the board display and if it persists for more than two seconds

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
it will be stored in memory.
w

p
ft

-li
w
Board can store in memory up to 32 faults, then it continues overwriting the older ones.

.u

.c
-li

w
Together with the fault code is stored also the time in hours (up to a maximum of 99 hours) elapsed since the previous

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
failure.

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
In case of wrong insertion of microcontroller on the socket, board display is off and leds on the external display are on.
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
In case of shortcut on transistor outputs, leds on the external display will blink.

.u

.c
-li
w

w
1.2FAULT CLASSIFICATION

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Faults are grouped in three categories (A, B, C) on the basis of their effect on the system.
w

p
w

w
f

Here it follows the description of each category:

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
FAULT

-li
w
.u

DESCRIPTION
t.c

w
CATEGORY
w

p
w

w
f
cn

Permanent system halt with its own blinking code.

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
With blinking code each call is denied.

w
w

f
n

If the system is hydraulic, cabin is moved to floor 0 (if previously programmed).

-li
w
.u

t.c

A
Fault will remain even if power line is deactivated.
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
Keep SPEEDY button pressed for 2 seconds to reactivate the system, or activate program mode and set

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
the value ‘0’ at the address 41, or put the system in maintenance mode.

w
w

f
n

-li
Interlocking plant until fault is present. w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Calls are accepted even with blinking code.

p
w

n
B
up

f
n

.u
Code keeps blinking until next call is done or power line is deactivated or manual cancel is performed

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
or SPEEDY button is pressed.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

Programming errors.
.u

t.c
-li

w
They are not stored in faults history.

p
w
p

f
n

.u
C Wrong values set during programming.
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
Programming halt for 2 seconds with a fixed programming error code.
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

Previously stored value is kept, wrong value is not stored.

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
Faults of types A and B block the normal service and car cannot move until faults persist.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

1.3FAULT READING
w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
To read the last 32 faults stored in memory you must press simultaneously SPEEDY and DATO push buttons.
p-

ft
w

To display the fault you must press these keys for at least 1 second. Once the code is shown, releasing the keys the fault
li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
is cancelled (to cancel the fault, after you release the keys you must wait one second without any pressing).
w
w

ft

Reading is completed when ‘99’ value is shown. w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
Faults are shown starting from the most recent.
p-

ft
w
ift

1.4FAULT LIST TOTAL CLEARING

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

To cancel all the faults from the list with a single operation, you must keep pressed SPEEDY button and hit 3 times
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

DATO. You must wait at least half of a second between each DATO hit and, at the 3rd hit, SPEEDY and DATO must
p-

ft
w

be kept pressed until ‘99’ is shown.

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

1
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
1.5FAULT LIST

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
FAULT FAULT Ref.

w
.u
FAULT DESCRIPTION

.c
-li
CODE w CATEGORY paragraph

w
w

ft
w

n
Missed start due to malfunction of the safety contact or safety contact has been

-li
w
5.17 CS

.u
0 – 31 B

.c
opened during the run and operator couldn’t close the doors.

p
w

ft

n
IF , ICV sensor doesn’t match doors zone sensor (APA), IF or ICV fault, or APA
n

5.7 APA

.u

.c
-li
37 w B 5.26 ICV/IF
.c

fault.

ft
w

p
Failed floors count ascending. IF/DB or ICV/DA sensors don’t switch properly or
ft

-li
w
.u
wrong floors number (address ‘32’ value greater than effective floors number).

.c
-li

38 B 5.26 ICV/IF

p
w

ft

n
Stop at top or bottom floor.
p

.u

.c
-li
wFailed floors count descending. IF/DB or ICV/DA sensors don’t switch properly
.u

.c

ft
or wrong floors number (address ‘32’ value greater than effective floors number).
w
39 B 5.26 ICV/IF

p
w

ft

-li
w
Stop at top or bottom floor.

.u

.c
-li
w

w
Stop zone not found: wrong placement sensors or IF fault if IF/ICV.

p
40 B 5.26 ICV/IF

ft
p

.u
41 B DRS or DRD sensors always opened or wiring fault. 5.35 RD/RS

-li
w
.u

t.c

6.6 Delayed

w
Stop zone too short or stop delay too long (address ‘26’ ).
w
42 B

p
w

n
Stopping

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

ICV slowing down sensor fault (IF/ICV configuration only). Stop on the floor on

w
43 B 5.26 ICV/IF

p
w
IF.
w

f
n

.u
‘High speed’ contactor’s solenoid or doors opening relays jammed

-li
44 B w 5.8 APG
.u

t.c

w
w
45 B Missed start during phasing procedure. 5.17 CS

p
w

w
f

‘Low speed’ contactor or closing doors relays jammed.

cn

.u
46 B 5.16 CPP

t.c
-li
w

w
47 B Ascent or Descent contactors jammed. 5.44 TSD

w
w

f
n

Faulty operator during opening. Doors partially opened or still closed. (APG

-li
w
.u

48 B 6.12 Doors
t.c

contact open, CS closed)

w

p
w

n
Opening doors contactor fault or wiring fault with doors still closed or safety
f

5.8 APG,
n

.u

t.c
49 B
-li
w

contact fault with opened doors. (APG closed, CS closed) 6.12 Doors
t.c

w
w
w

f
5.16 CPP
n

Closing doors contactor fault or wiring fault with doors still opened or safety

-li
w
f

.u

50 B 5.17 CS
t.c
-li

contact fault with closed doors. (CPP closed, CS opened)

w
6.12 Doors

p
w

n
up

5.19 CT
f
n

.u
51 B Descent contactor coil fault or wiring fault

t.c
-li
w

5.44 TSD
t.c

w
5.19 CT
w

52 B Ascent contactor coil fault or wiring fault

f
n

5.44 TSD

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

‘low speed’ contactor coil fault or wiring fault

-li

53 B 5.16 CPP
w

p
w

DRS always closed or RS input always to ground or wrong floors number (address
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

54 B/A 32 is less than effective floors number ). (at the second fault in a row the halt is 5.35 RD/RS
t.c

t.
w
w

permanent)
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

DRD always closed or RD input always to ground or wrong floors number

.c
-li
w

p
(address 32 is less than effective floors number ). (at the second fault in a row the
w

55 B/A 5.35 RD/RS

ft
w

.u
halt is permanent)
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
7.6 Engine
w

56 B/A Motor thermal protection

w

ft

Temperature
w
.u

FS3 input doesn’t switch from lower floor (RD) to the upper one (RS).
.c
li
w

57 A 5.23 FS3
w
p-

ft

3.2.3
w

58 C Value programmed not valid. Value stored is maintained. Programming

li
w
.u

.c

.
Mode
p-

w
w
w

ft

3.2.3
n

Lift stops’ number faulty (> 32 or < 2). Value stored is maintained. w
n

.u

59 C Programming
.c
li
w
.c

w
Mode
p-

ft
w

Operator faulty in closing doors and doors partially opened or completely opened
ift

li
w

61 B 6.12 Doors
.u

.c

or safety contact fault with closed doors. (CPP open, CS open)

p-
w
w

ft

Internal cabin serial fault or wiring fault. …

n

62 B
n

.u

.c
li
w

63 B External cabin serial fault or wiring fault. …

.c

p-

ft

Speed change not done, ‘high speed’ contactor jammed.

w

64 B 5.8 APG
ft

li
w

‘high speed’ contactor coil fault or wiring fault

.u

65 B 5.16 CPP
.c
li

p-
w
p-

7.2 Re-opening
w

ft

67 Re-opening devices (CM or PAP) active over maximum time Devices

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

68 B Short circuits on the outputs

.c

p-

ft
w

… … …
w

…
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

70 B Thermoresistance that measures the oil temperature.

p-

TO
w
p-

ft

Fault inverter, make sure that the inverter is not in fault status. verifies that
n

.u
li
w
.u

72 B the input 9-FLT (DB-15 connector on vvv_f interface expansion) is

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

closed.
n

w
.u

.c
li
w

Maximum travel time for floor approaching in up direction expired

w
p-

7.3 Maximum
w

ft
w

76 B It occurs when the maximun travel time (TMC) expires for the first time
n

Travel Time
li
w
.u

The lift is not blocked and you can try again.

.c

p-
w

Maximum travel time for floor approaching in down direction expired. 7.3 Maximum
w

ft

77 B Travel Time
n

.u

.c
li
w

2
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
It occurs when the maximun travel time (TMC) expires for the first time.

lif
n

w
The lift is not blocked and you can try again.

.u

.c

p-

w
w
Maximum travel time for high speed in up direction expired.

ft

w
7.3 Maximum

.u
78 B It occurs when the maximun travel time (TMC) expires for the first time .

.c
-li
w Travel Time

w
The lift is not blocked and you can try again.

ft
w

n
Maximum travel time for high speed in down direction expired.

-li
w
.u

.c
7.3 Maximum
79 B It occurs when the maximun travel time (TMC) expires for the first time .

p
Travel Time

ft

n
The lift is not blocked and you can try again.
n

.u

.c
-li
w Maximum travel run time expired.
.c

ft
w

p
It occurs after two consecutive times that the maximum travel time expires.
ft

n
7.3 Maximum

-li
w
80 A

.u
Travel Time

.c
The first time the maximum travel time expires one of the fault 76, 77, 78 or 79
-li

p
w

ft
occurs, according to the state the lift was, when the time TMC has expired.

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w 5.10 BAT
.u

.c

5.20 EM

w
81 A System overrun.

ft
w

p
5.21 EXC
w

ft

-li
w
5.35 RD/RS

.u

.c
-li
w

82 A Re-levelling fault. (re-levelling timeout) 9.1 Relevelling

p
w

ft
p

83 A Safety circuit fault. (control on CS1) 5.18 CS1

n

.u
-li
w
.u

5.35 RD/RS
t.c

Run direction opposite to set run direction. (opening RD in ascent, opening RS in

w
w
84 A 7.4 Run

p
w

n
descent)

w
Direction
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

3.2.3

p
w
85 A Reserved
w

Programming
p

f
n

.u
Mode.

-li
w
.u

t.c

Error control of the switch 1 on the brake or on the second descent valve 9.11

w
w

p
w

86 A Amendament

w
f
cn

.u
A3

t.c
-li
w

w
Error control of the switch 2 on the brake or on the second descent valve 9.11

w
w

87 A Amendament

f
n

-li
w
.u

A3
t.c

…
w
88 A Shaft access attempt (Valid for systems without heading).

p
w

n
f
n

.u
89 A Fault control A3 amendment failed

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
… … … …

w
w

f
n

90 (*) B System Reset – WDT Timeout

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

91 (*) B System Reset – Brownout

w

p
w

n
System Reset – MCLR from run
up

92 (*) B
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

System Reset – MCLR from sleep

t.c

93 (*) B

w
w

System Reset – WDT from sleep

f
n

94 (*) B

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

System Reset – RST Instruction

-li

95 (*) B
w

p
w

… … …
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

98 (*) B System Reset

t.c

t.
w
w

… … …
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

(*)The alarms 85, 86, 87, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 and 98 are referred to the diagnostics of the board. If any of this alarms
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

occurs you must immediately report the problem.

w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

1.6IMMEDIATE INFORMATION
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

When the system is in Running mode you can display the active state of some system signals, pressing DATA push
w
p-

ft
w

button, by the following codes:

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

CODE DESCRIPTION w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
0-31 Missed expansion serial at floor XX, if the code is equal at number of floor (add. 32) no
p-

ft
w
ift

expansion serial missing.

li
w
.u

.c

p-

41 ALT pressed.
w
w

ft

42 Photoelectric sensor obscured (CM).

n

.u

.c
li
w

43 Opening door push button pressed (PAP).

.c

p-

ft
w

44 Closing door push button pressed (PCP).

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

45 Overload (CCS).
p-
w
p-

ft

46 Full load (CCC).

n

.u

.c
li
w

47 Car busy (CCO).

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

48 Alarm push button (AA)

w

ft

li
w
.u

49 Emergency (EM)
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

50 Ascent inspection button pressed (PSM).

w

ft
n

.u

51 Descent inspection button pressed (PDM).

li
w
.u

.c

p-

52 Inspection (MAN).
w
w

ft

53 Fire service mode

.u

.c
li
w

54 Internal mode
p-

ft
w

55 Duplex mode
li
w
.u

.c

p-

60 Count-down the hours completed (add.47,48,49)

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

3
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
2.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
BOARD PROGRAMMING

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
2.1 “PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION” TABLE

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c
ADDRESS DATA DESCRIPTION REF.

p
w

ft

n
0 No beep on car push button AP2 = second entrance door opening activation
n

.u

.c
5.38 SNR,

-li
w
.c

1 No beep on car push button AP2 signals the activation of Inspection Mode 5.6 AP2

ft
0
w

p
ft

2 Beep on car push button AP2 = second entrance door opening activation 6.12.6 Multi-

-li
w
.u
Entrances

.c
-li

3 Beep on car push button AP2 signals the activation of Inspection Mode

p
w

ft

n
0 OPEN DOORS parking Plant with 2 speeds
p

.u

.c
-li
4 w
OPEN DOORS parking Plant with 1 speed
.u

.c

6.14 Parking

ft
1
w
8 CLOSE DOORS parking Plant with 2 speeds

p
w

6.18 Speed
ft

-li
w
.u
12 CLOSE DOORS parking Plant with 1 speed

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

0 Normal selector (ICV) Manual doors

n

.u
-li
w
.u

(CP= Sliding block activation)

t.c

w
w

p
w

(AP= Gong activation)

w
f

.u

t.c
16 Normal selector (ICV) Automatic doors
-li
w

p
w
(CP= Closing door command)
w

6.11 Near

f
n

.u
-li
w (AP= Opening first door activation) Landing and
.u

t.c

w
32 Long selector (ICV) Manual doors Slowing Down
w

p
w

n
6.12 Doors

w
f

(CP= Sliding block activation)

cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
(AP= Gong activation)

w
w

f
48 Long selector (ICV) Automatic doors
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

(CP= Closing door command)

w

p
w

n
(AP= Opening first door activation)
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

0 Internal mode
t.c

w
5.27 INT

w
w

(INT = Internal mode activation)

p

5.37 SCP

f
n

-li
w
f

6.12.6 Multi
.u

(SCP = IF sensors for INVERTER control)

t.c
-li

Entrances
w
3

p
w

n
6.17 Inverter
up

f
n

.u
64 Three entrances

t.c
-li
w

Management
t.c

(INT = Door photodetector for third entrance) 9.8 Fire Service

w
w

f
Mode
n

(SCP = Open signal for the third entrance)

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

0 Stopping on the synchronizing sensors Inspection operation in high speed

w

p
w
p

during inspection service mode

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

1 Stopping on the synchronizing sensors Inspection operation in low speed

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
during inspection service mode
n

9.6 Inspection

-li
w
f

4
.u

.c

Mode
-li
w

2 Stopping at extreme landing during Inspection operation in high speed, low speed on
w

p
w

ft

inspection service mode synchronizing sensors

w

.u
li
w

3 Stopping at extreme landing during Inspection operation in low speed

.u

.c

p-

w
w

inspection service mode

w

ft

w
.u

0 Arriving with fixed light Plant in halt after return at P0

.c
li
w

8.1.3 Arrival
w
4 Arriving with fixed light Plant immediately in Halt (look at the Note)
p-

Signalling,
ft
w

5 8.5 ‘Reserved’
n

8 Arriving with blinking light Plant in halt after return at P0

li
w
.u

.c

Signal

.
p-

12 Arriving with blinking light Plant immediately in Halt (look at the Note)

w
w
w

ft

0 No full load sensor (CCC) Traction plant w

n

.u

.c
li
w

16 No full load sensor (CCC) Hydraulic plant

.c

w
7.5 Movable
p-

6
ft
w

32 With full load sensor (CCC) Traction plant platform

ift

li
w
.u

.c

48 With full load sensor (CCC) Hydraulic plant

p-
w
w

ft

6.5 Landing and

n

0 Normal slowdown magnetic sensors placement

n

.u

Slowing Down
.c
li
w

7 64 Inverted slowdown magnetic sensors placement Zone’s Magnetic

.c

p-

ft
w

Sensor Layout
ft

li
w
.u

0 1 GONG in up and 1 in down direction Arrival + Position (serial outputs type A)

.c
li

p-
w
p-

(ref. Serial board User Manual)

w

ft

n
n

.u

1 1 GONG in up and 1 in down direction Arrival and Position separated (serial outputs
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

type B) (ref. Serial board User Manual)

w

ft
w
w

ft

8
li
w
.u

6.8 Gong
.c
li
w

p-

2 1 GONG in up and 2 in down direction Arrival + Position (serial outputs type A)

w
p-

ft

(ref. Serial board User Manual)

n

.u
li
w
.u

3 1 GONG in up and 2 in down direction Arrival and Position separated (serial outputs
.c

p-

w
w

type B) (ref. Serial board User Manual)

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

64
n

IF/DB e ICV/DA close at landing

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

4
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
ADDRESS DATA DESCRIPTION REF.

w
p-

t
lif
n
0 Gong on speed change Synchronizing/phasing at landing 0

w
6.8 Gong

.u

.c

p-
4 Gong on speed change Synchronizing/phasing at the upper landing

w
9.7 Synchronizing

w
9

ft

n
8 Gong on car stopping Synchronizing/phasing at landing 0

w
.u

.c
-li
w 12 Gong on car stopping Synchronizing/phasing at the upper landing

w
w

ft
w
Door’s control disabled (control panel without

p
0 Sent alarm signalling on landing serial

-li
w
.u

.c
board (ref. Serial board user manual) doors contactors AP and CP, board doors

p
w

ft
operator)

n
n

.u
Sent alarm signalling on landing serial Door’s control enabled (control panel with doors

.c
-li
16 w
.c

ft
board (ref. Serial board user manual) contactors AP and CP, direct command door
w

p
ft

-li
w
motor)

.u

.c
-li

5.12.1 Doors
Door’s control disabled (control panel without

w
10 32 Without Sent alarm signalling on

p
w

ft
Controls

n
p

landing serial board (ref. Serial board doors contactors AP and CP, board doors
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

user manual) operator)

ft
w

p
w

Door’s control enabled (control panel with doors

ft

n
48

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Without Sent alarm signalling on contactors AP and CP, direct command door

p
w

ft
landing serial board (ref. Serial board motor)
p

.u
-li
user manual) w
.u

t.c

w
w
11 0 Serial wiring disabled

p
w

6.4 Serial and

w
f

.u
64 Serial wiring enabled Parallel Wiring

t.c
-li
w

p
0 Operator OFF during run return at floor 0 after 14 minutes ENABLED

w
w

f
n

.u
(hydraulic plants only)

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
1 Operator OFF during run return at floor 0 after 14 minutes DISABLED
w

p
w

n
(hydraulic plants only) 6.12 Doors

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li

12
w

6.14.1 Parking
2 Operator ON during run return at floor 0 after 14 minutes ENABLED

w
Operation

w
w

f
(hydraulic plants only)
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

3 Operator ON during run return at floor 0 after 14 minutes DISABLED

w

p
w

n
(hydraulic plants only)
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

0 Automatic synchronizing SINGLE CALL PLANT

t.c

w
w
2.5 Programmable
w

13 4 Automatic synchronizing COLLECTIVE PLANT

p

f
n

input/output

-li
w
f

8 Synchronizing after call SINGLE CALL PLANT

.u

t.c

9.7 Synchronizing
-li

w
12 Synchronizing after call COLLECTIVE PLANT

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

0 DA-DB (ref. Picture No.1) Collective plant Standard management

t.c

w
w

5.26 ICV/IF
p

f
n

-li
w 6.5 Landing and
f

.u

t.c
-li

16 DA-DB (ref. Picture No.1) Collective plant Easy management Slowing Down
w

p
w

Zone’s Magnetic
p

14
f
n

.u
Sensor Layout
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
32 ICV-IF (ref. Picture No.1) Collective plant Standard management 6.16 Plant type

w
w

p
w

8.2 Direction

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
48 ICV-IF (ref. Picture No.1) Collective plant Easy management

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

5.26 ICV/IF,
.c

0 IF/DB e ICV/DA open at landing

p-

w
w

6.5 Landing and

w

ft

15 w
Slowing Down
.u

.c
li
w

64 Zone’s Magnetic
w
p-

IF/DB e ICV/DA close at landing

w

ft

Sensor Layout
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

NOTE: if immediate halt is programmed with ‘4’ or ‘12’ at address 5, board performs the following functions :
.c

w
p-

ft
w

 enable re-levelling with elevator halted;

ift

li
w
.u

 on rope elevators, fault ‘81’ generates plant jam

.c

p-
w
w

ft

 enable check on run direction (fault ‘84’)

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

 enable phasing with stop or maintenance out of floor in high speed plants
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

Halt after return to floor 0 (programming ‘0’ or ‘1’ at the address 5) happens only in the following
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

conditions:
n

.u

.c
li
w

 elevator is hydraulic
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

 elevator is halted but without code fault ‘44’ and ‘62’

w

ft

li
w
.u

 not in inspection operation

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

 not in ‘PRESET mode’

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

5
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-
2.2 “PROGRAMMABLE TIMES” TABLE

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w LIMIT

w
ADDRESS LABEL DESCRIPTION REF.

ft
w

p
VALUES

-li
w
.u

.c
5.33 PCP

p
w

ft

n
6.9 Immediate
16 2 – 45 sec. TAP Opening doors waiting time
n

.u

.c
-li
w Starting
.c

6.12 Doors

ft
w

p
2 – 45 sec.
ft

n
17 TOP Maximum time door opening command is active. 6.12 Doors

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

18 2 – 45 sec. THC Maximum time door closing command is active. 6.12 Doors

p
w

ft

n
Door opening delay after stop at floor and delay on door opening
p

2 – 99 tenths
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

19 TRA (pre-opening) earlier then the detection of APA signal with safety 6.12 Doors
.c

of sec.

ft
w
circuit (TRA>=70, delay=TRA-70).

p
w

ft

-li
w
0 – 99 tenths

.u

.c
-li
w

20 TIG Gong pulse duration (0 → disabled) 6.8 Goong

p
w
of sec

ft
p

.u
5.17 CS
Maximum time between door closure and ‘no car start’ fault is

-li
w
.u

10 – 99 sec.
t.c

21 TMP 7.2 Re-opening

w
w
signalled.

p
w

Devices

w
f

.u
Maximum travel run time. Maximum timeout during which drive

t.c
-li
w

p
w
commands are activated between floors (they are reset next to the
w

f
7.3 Maximum
n

.u
22 10 – 99 sec TMC stopping zone and to the slowing down zone)

-li
w
.u

Travel
t.c

(If <10  TMC=typical; If >=80 time = 80 + (tmc-80)*10). If = 99

w
w

p
w

w
control disable.
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

6.11 Enlarged

w
w
w

Slowing Down
p

f
n

1 – 99 tenths

-li
w Zone and Non-
.u

23 RCPV Slowing down delay

t.c

of sec Regular Floor

w

p
w

n
Distances
f
n

.u
6.18 Speed

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
6.12 doors
0 – 99 tenths

w
w

Time during which the “Busy” signal is ON after start closing doors.
p

f
24 TOC 8.6 Reserved
n

-li
of sec w
f

.u

Signal
t.c
-li

w
OLEODINAMIC plant:

p
w

n
up

- 1-69 →TP Y/Delta;

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

- 70-99 →TP always ON and TG delayed of TST-70 5.16 CPP

w
w

f
5.40 TG
0 – 99 tenths
n

* If TST <70 and it is an odd value, the board check the activation of

-li
w
f

.u

25 TST 5.43 TP
t.c
-li

of sec the CPP input before activating the TS signal.

w
6.2 Delta/Star

p
w

ROPE plant:
p

Starting
f
n

.u
-li
w

- 0-69 →TP low speed;

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

- 70-99 →TP delayed of TST – 70;

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

0 – 99 tenths
.c
-li
w

26 TRIF Stop delay after magnetic sensors stop area detection 5.17 CS
w

p
w

of sec.
ft
w

.u
1 – 99 x 10 Waiting time since quenching ‘busy’ signal before moving the car to
li
w
.u

.c

27 TSN 6.14 Parking

p-

the programmed floor at address ‘34’.

w
sec.
w
w

ft

Battery detachment time after Emergency procedure activation (EM w

.u

.c
li
w

1 – 99 min.
w
28 SBA input) and no further A (alarm) button press. 6.3 Battery
p-

ft
w

(99 → No detachment)
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
0-93= TMR3 between FS3 input and CPF output [dec. of sec.]
p-

w
5.15 CPF
w
w

ft

94= TMR3 between FS3 input and CPF output , value =addr. 27 [minutes].
n

5.23 FS3
0 – 99 tenths w
n

.u

95=The output CPF is used for signaling out of service.

.c
li
w

29 CHF 6.15 Timers

.c

w
of sec
p-

96= CPF is used as the output enable forced closure and alarm sound’s.
w

9.8 Fire Fervice

ft
w
ift

Mode
>= ’97’, the CPF output signal drive the high speed.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

9.1 Re-levelling
w
w

ft

5.33 PCP
n

.u

.c
li
w

Re-levelling timeout ( 0→ control disabled) 6.12.2 Door

.c

0 – 99 sec.
p-

30 RIP
w

Opening
ft
w

SAP function activation on PCP input programming an even value

ft

Exclusion
li
w
.u

During Testing
.c
li

p-
w

Operation
p-

ft

5.18 CS1
n

.u

0 99 tenths of
.c
li
w
.u

31 L13 TMR1 between CS1 and RU 5.36 RU

.c

p-

sec.
w

ft
w

6.15 timers
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

6
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
2.3“PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS” TABLE

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
lif
n
LIMIT

w
.u

.c
ADDRESS LABEL DESCRIPTION REF.

p-

w
w
VALUES

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
32 w 2 – 32 NF Total number of landings 6.12.6 Multi-

w
entrances

ft
w

p
Underground floors 8.1.2 Underground
0 – 78

n
33 NS

-li
w
Floors

.u

.c
Standing floor

p
0 – 32

w
34 NST

ft
6.14 Parking

n
(Return after the time programmed at address 27 )
n

.u

.c
-li
w 6.11 Enlarged
.c

First irregular floor (lower interfloor distance than normal) or landing next to

ft
w
Slowing Down

p
ft

enlarged slowing down zone, adding 50 to the corresponding landing.

n
0 – 99

-li
w
35 PB1 Zone and Non-

.u

.c
-li

( Non - regular distance from the floor above ). Regular Floor

p
w

ft

n
Distances
p

.u

.c
6.14.2 Parking

-li
w First landing with reversed parking state of the door.
.u

.c

36 0 - 32 SPA1 With Open or

ft
w

p
w

ft

Close Doors

-li
w
.u
Second landing with reversed parking state of the door. 6.14.2 Parking

.c
-li
w

w
37 0 - 32 SPA2 With Open or

p
w

ft
p

Close Doors
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Sensors unlinked up with the car serial board (Ref. Serial boards user manual) 7.5 Movable
t.c

w
Platform
w
( 0 = none, 1 = RS, 2 = RD, 4 = ICV, 8 = IF, 16 = CCC, Sum = more sensors at the

p
0 – 31
w

38 EIS

n
10.2.1 Wiring to

w
f

same time).

.u
the VEG0400 Car

t.c
-li
w

Serial Board

p
w
Landing fireman (ref.‘Fire service mode’)
w

39 0 – 32 NPM
p

9.8 Fire Service

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Second irregular floor (lower interfloor distance than normal) or landing next 6.11 Enlarged
t.c

w
w
Slowing Down

p
to enlarged slowing down zone, adding 50 to the corresponding landing.
w

n
40 0 – 99 PB2 Zone and Non-

w
f
cn

.u
( Irregular distance from the floor above ).

t.c
-li
w

Regular Floor

w
w
Distances
w

f
n

41 0 SBL Unlock code ( If  0 blocked plant )

-li
w
.u

t.c

Third irregular floor (lower interfloor distance than normal) or landing next to 6.11 Enlarged
w

p
w

n
Slowing Down
enlarged slowing down zone, adding 50 to the corresponding landing.
f
n

.u
0 – 99

t.c
42 PB3
-li
w

Zone and Non-

t.c

( Irregular distance from the floor above ).

w
Regular Floor

w
w

f
Distances
n

-li
w
f

.u

0 – 32
t.c

43 PPE Emergency landing called (automatic call) but only in down direction
-li

9.2 Emergency
w

p
Tenths of sec. – Delay time on switching contactors’control TS, TD, TP, TG,
w

n
6.12 Doors
up

44 0 - 99 RITUSC
n

.u

t.c
-li

7.1 Safety Circuit

w

RCP, RAP
t.c

w
Tenths of sec. – Delay time on control inputs EXC, ALT, CS, RD, RS, TSD, 6.12.1 doors
w

f
n

controls

-li
45 0 - 99 RITING w
f

APG, CPP, EM, CS1. delay reverse direction driving

.u

9.6 Inspection
t.c
-li

w
Mode

p
w

centes of sec – Rebound time on calls

p

46 0 - 99 LETT 5.31 PAP

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Decades/Units of the max number of working hours or of time elapsed for six-
t.c

t.
w
47 0 - 99 DU
w

p
w

monthly check

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

Thousands/Hundreds of max number of working hours or of time elapsed for

0 – 99
w
48 MC

p
w

ft

six-monthly check
w

.u
li
w

Hundreds/Decades of thousands of max number of working hours.

.u

.c

p-

w
w

If CDM < 90 it is enabled the countdown of max number of working hours

w

ft

49 0 – 99 CDM If CDM = 90 it is enabled the hours counter for the six-monthly check. w
.u

.c
li
w

w
If CDM > 90 it is enabled the hours counter for the six-monthly check with
p-

ft
w

the activation of the SAR output to signal that the time (4300h) has expired.
li
w
.u

.c

.
1–7
p-

50 POR0 Car entrances at landing 0 1 = First car entrance

w
w
w

ft

51 1–7 POR1 Car entrances at landing 1 2 = Second car entrance w

n

.u

.c
li
w

52 1–7 POR2 Car entrances at landing 2 4 = Third car entrance

.c

w
p-

ft
w

53 1–7 POR3 Car entrances at landing 3 Sum = more entrances at the same
ift

li
w
.u

1–7 landing. For the simultaneous opening

.c

54 POR4 Car entrances at landing 4

p-

6.12.6 Multi-
w

of the first and second car entrances

w

1–7
ft

Car entrances at landing 5 Entrance

n

55 POR5
n

.u

1–7 disable the third car entrance and

.c
li
w

56 POR6 Car entrances at landing 6

.c

program ‘4’ at address 3

p-

ft

1–7
w

57 POR7 Car entrances at landing 7

ft

li
w

1–7
.u

58 POR8 Car entrances at landing 8

.c
li

p-
w

1–7
p-

Car entrances at landing 9

w

59 POR9
ft

n
n

.u

.c

6.12.1
li
w
.u

Number of closing attempts with security contact faulty

.c

Doors’Control
p-

60 0 - 99 NUMCH
ft
w

‘+16’ = fixed mapping of serial output 10 Serial

w

ft

li
w

Expansion
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

7
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
Serial boards calls management (ref. Serial boards user manual)

w
lif

.u
1 = external serial enabling (VEG0400) and exclusion of landing serial boards

.c

w
(VEG800, ITF800, LCD600, VEG0700, FLOORDIS…)

p-

t
2.5 Programmable

lif
n
2 = Car serial board exclusion (VEG400, SERCAR...)

w
Inputs/Outputs

.u

.c

p-
5.2 A/B//C/D

w
4 = Car wiring (parallel)

w
w

ft
8.1 Position

n
8 = up reservation activation

w
/Arrival/

.u

.c
-li
w 16 = position coded on 0-23 Reservation

w
61 0 -63 CESER

ft
6.4 Serial or
w

p
32 = A,B,C,D binary (no inverted binary)

n
Parallel Wiring

-li
w
.u
64 = Multiplexing on call’s inputs. 10.1.3 Landing

.c

w
Calls Management

p
Programming '16’ = position and ‘32‘= decoded binary encoding is

ft

n
9.3 Platform
n

.u
Management

.c
-li
w activated gray code on ABCD and the 7-segment code on the outputs
.c

ft
w
P0, P1 ....

p
ft

-li
w
.u
sum = more options at the same time

.c
-li

p
w
1 = Local input MAN n.c.

ft

n
p

.u

.c
2 = ptc probe (TM n.o.) and oil temperature (TO) exclusion

-li
w 7.1 Safety Circuit,
.u

.c

6.1 Door’s Pre

ft
4 = CS1 safety circuit control enabling
w

p
w

ft

Opening,

n
8 = Input APA→ re-levelling zone and door pre-opening

-li
w
.u
7.6 Engine
0 – 99

.c
-li

62 NSEC
w

16 = close doors re-levelling Temperature

p
w

ft
9.1 Relevelling
p

32 = local input CCS n.c.

n

.u
9.3 Platform

-li
w
.u

Management
t.c

64 = Delay increased at the starting

w
w

p
w

Sum = More options at the same time.

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

1 = Movable platform disabled

p
w
w

2 = MAN PRESENT mode

p

6.11 Enlarged

f
n

.u
-li
4 = duplex plant w Slowing Down
.u

t.c

Zone and Non-

w
w
8 = low speed mode between not regular floors

p
w

Regular Floor

n
63 0 - 63 MISC

w
f

Distances
cn

16 = Master duplex mode

.u

t.c
-li
w

6.16.4 Duplex

w
32 = hoistway without head and pit

w
7.5 Movable
w

f
n

64=A3 emendament actived Platform

-li
w
.u

t.c

Sum = More options at the same time.

w

p
w

n
… … … … …
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

80 0 – 99 ABL Set 0 for the management through encoder activation

t.c

w
w
w

0 – 99 (encoder increment)

f
81 DFR
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

82 0 – 99 Not used
w

p
w

n
0 – 99
up

83 DMA Not used

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

84 0 – 99 D1P (x 50 encoder increments) deceleration distance V1P

t.c

w
w

0 – 99
p

f
85 D2P (x 50 encoder increments) deceleration distance V2P
n

-li
w
f

.u

0 – 99
t.c
-li

86 D3P (x 50 encoder increments) deceleration distance V3P

w

p
w

87 0 – 99 D4P (x 50 encoder increments) deceleration distance V4P

p

f
n

.u
-li
w

88 0 – 99 LMG (x 4 encoder increments) dimension of door area magnets

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

(x 50 encoder increments) low speed deceleration distance (rephasing and

p
w

f
0 – 99
n

89 DCP

-li
w
f

.u

maintenance)
.c
-li
w

p
Multiplex index for connection with MCU Control board (RS232).
w

ft
w

.u
90 0-99 Note: put +16 if the version of the supervision software for PC is previous
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
version V4.3.0
w
w

ft

Number of floors missing from the bottom of a multiplex system with w

.u

.c
li
w

91 0-15
w
MCU board than the other simplex
p-

ft
w

92 0-99 Closing up speed

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

Maintenance and re-phasing speed ( % with reference to the analog output

w
w

93 0-99 VMN
w

ft

from 0 to 7 V) w
n

.u

.c
li
w

94 0-99 V1P Speed V1P

.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

V2P Speed V2P

n

95 0-99
li
w
.u

.c

p-

96 0-99 V3P Speed V3P

w
w

ft

99= normal mode

n

.u

0-99
.c

97
li
w

0-98=monitoring I/O
.c

p-

ft
w

Language of programming Keypad:

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

0=Italian;
p-
w
p-

ft

98 0-2 LANG 1=English;

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

2= France;
.u

.c

p-

ft

+16= Automatic calls active.

w
w

ft

li
w

0=Normal mode
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

2=Test input(output);
p-

ft

99 0-99
n

98=Restore last configuration sent by the PC software (0 to 63)

.u
li
w
.u

.c

99= restore default;

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

8
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
2.4DEFAULTS TABLES

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
The control board is provided with the following default configuration.

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
2.4.1 Default “Functions Table”
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c
ADD. DATA DESCRIPTION

p
w

ft

n
0 01 Beep on car push buttons disabled
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

1 08 CLOSE DOORS parking - Plant with 2 speeds

ft
w

p
ft

n
2 16 Normal selector (ICV) – Automatic Doors

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
3 00 Internal mode

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
Inspection operation in high speed, low speed on synchronizing magnetic sensors (RS, RD)

.c
-li
w
.u

4 02
.c

w
Stop at furthermost floors in inspection operation

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
5 04 Arriving with blinking light - Plant immediately in Halt

.u

.c
-li
w

w
Full Load Sensor not managed (CCC) – Hydraulic plant

p
6 16

ft
p

.u
-li
7 00 w
Normal slowdown magnetic sensors placement
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

8 01 1 GONG in up and 1 in down direction - Arrival and Position separated (serial outputs type B)

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

9 08 Gong on car stopping – Synchronizing/Phasing at floor 0

p
w
w

f
Without Sent alarm signalling on landing serial board - Door’s control disabled
n

.u
10 32

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
11 64 Serial wiring enabled

p
w

w
f
cn

Door Operator ON during run – Return to floor 0 after 14 minutes DISABLED

.u
12 03

t.c
-li
w

w
w
13 04 Automatic Synchronizing - COLLECTIVE PLANT
w

f
n

-li
16 DA/DB – Collective plant easy management w
.u

14
t.c

p
64
w

15 IF/DB e ICV/DA close at landing

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

2.4.2 Default “Times Table”

w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

ADD. DATA LABEL DESCRIPTION

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

Pending with open doors with active ‘Busy’ signal = 12s

-li

16 12 s TAP
w

p
w
p

17 08 s TOP Maximum time door opening command is active = 8s

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

18 08 s TCH Maximum time door closing command is active = 8s

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

19 3 t. TRA Door opening delay after stop at floor = 0.3s

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

20 20 t. TIG Gong impulse duration = 2s

w

p
w

ft
w

21 30 s TMP Maximum time between door closure and ‘no car start’ fault is signalled = 30s
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

22 80 s TMC Maximum travel time = 80s

w
w
w

ft

23 01 t. RCPV Slowing down delay = 0.1s w

.u

.c
li
w

Time during which the “Busy” signal is ON after start closing doors. = 5s
w
24 50 t. TOC
p-

ft
w

25 70 t. TST TP= always ON

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
26 04 t. TRIF Stop delay after magnetic sensors stop area detection = 0.4s
w
w

ft

60x10s TSN Waiting time before parking operation = 660s w

n

27
.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

28 60min SBA Battery detachment time after Emergency procedure activation = 60 min
w

ft
w
ift

li
w

29 98 CHF CPF output signal drive the high speed.

.u

.c

p-
w

30 12s RIP Relevelling timeout = 12s

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

9
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
2.4.3 Default “Parameters Table”

lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
IND. wDATO LABEL DESCRIPTION

w
w

ft
w

p
8 NP 8 floors

n
32

-li
w
.u

.c
33 10 NS Not underground floors

p
w

ft

n
34 32 NST Not parking floor
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

35 32 PB1 None couple of near landing

ft
w

p
ft

n
36 32 SPA1

-li
w
.u
None parking floor at open doors

.c
-li

37 32 SPA2

p
w

ft

n
p

Sensors are excluded from car serial board

.u

.c
-li
31 EIS w
.u

38
.c

(See serial Boards user Manual)

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
39 00 NPM Fire service floor= floor 0

.u

.c
-li
w

w
40 32 PB2 None couple of near landing

p
w

ft
p

.u
41 00 SBL Unlocking code

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
42 32 PB3 None couple of near landing
w

p
w

w
f

32 PPE Return at landing 0 during emergency with open doors

.u
43

t.c
-li
w

p
44 15 RITUSC Rebound time on output relays (S, D, P, G, CP, AP) = 1.5s

w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
Rebound time on input relays (EXC, ALT, CS, RD, RS, TSD, APG, CPP, EM, CS1)
.u

t.c

06 RITING

w
w
45 = 0.6s

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
46 05 LETT Rebound time (Delay) on calls = 0.05s

t.c
-li
w

w
w
47 00 DU
w

f
n

-li
48 00 MC w
It is enabled the hours counter.
.u

t.c

p
49 90 CDM
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

50 01 POR0
t.c

w
w
w

51 01 POR1
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

52 01 POR2
t.c
-li

p
w

53 01 POR3

n
For any stops, doors opening side is ‘1’
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

54 01 POR4
t.c

First entrance managed from AP output

w
w

55 01 POR5
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

56 01 POR6
t.c
-li

p
w

57 01 POR7
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

58 01 POR8
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

59 01 POR9
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

60 20 NUMCH 4 closing attempts with security contacts faulty + fixed mapping

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

61 22 CESER Internal car serial board exclused

w

.u
li
w
.u

Ptc probe exclusion (TM n.o.)

.c

p-

w
w

62 26 NSEC Input APA→ re-levelling zone and door pre-opening

w

ft

w
.u

.c

Re-levelling even with close doors enabled

li
w

w
p-

ft
w

MAN PRESENT mode not enabled

n

63 9 MISC
li
w
.u

Low speed mode between not regular floors enabled

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

99 Encoder disabled
ft

80
n

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

90 00 Multiplex index for connection with MCU Control board (RS232).

.c

w
p-

ft
w

Number of floors missing from the bottom of a multiplex system with MCU board
ift

91 00
li
w
.u

than the other simplex

.c

p-
w
w

ft

97 99 99= normal mode

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Language of programming Keypad:

.c

98 01 LANG
p-

ft

1=English;
w
ft

li
w

99 00 0=Normal mode
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

10
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
2.5PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS/OUTPUTS (0/23)

p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
In the control board, there are 24 proglammable I/O. This inputs/outputs are multiplexed on the control boards connectors

w
w

ft

w
0-23. This I/O are used to collect calls in parallel mode and to provide the relative light signaling.

.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
2.5.1 Programmable I/O (0-23)

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
In the table below are represented the most relevant I/O mappings for single call systems. In the table is also specified the

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
programming of the control board (at address 13 and address 61) to obtain the desired I/O mapping.
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
PARALLEL SERIAL

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Parallel CAR Serial

ft
w
CONTROL

p
w

ft

n
Parallel + +

-li
w
BOARD

.u
Car Serial

.c
-li
w

PIN (*) (One pole for floor position) Position with DEC16 Position with DEC16

p
w

ft
p

(or binary) (or binary)

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Dw Dw Dw Dw
w

p
w

Up/Dw Single call Up/Dw Single call Up/Dw Up/Dw

w
reserved/ reserved/ reserved/ reserved/
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

reserved (only car) reserved (only car) reserved reserved

w
Single call Single call Single call Single call

p
w
w

f
n

.u
0 --- S/L0 C/L0 --- D/L0 C/L0 --- S/L0 --- D/L0

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
1 S/L0 D/L1 C/L1 S/L0 D/L1 C/L1 S/L0 D/L1 S/L0 D/L1

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
2 D/L1 D/L2 C/L2 D/L1 D/L2 C/L2 D/L1 D/L2 D/L1 D/L2

t.c
-li
w

w
w
3 S/L1 D/L3 C/L3 S/L1 D/L3 C/L3 S/L1 D/L3 S/L1 D/L3
w

f
n

-li
4 D/L2 D/L4 C/L4 D/L2 D/L4 wC/L4 D/L2 D/L4 D/L2 D/L4
.u

t.c

p
5 S/l2 D/L5 C/L5 S/L2 D/L5 C/L5 S/L2 D/L5 S/L2 D/L5
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

6 D/L3 D/L6 C/L6 D/L3 D/L6 C/L6 D/L3 D/L6 D/L3 D/L6
t.c

w
w
w

7 S/L3 D/L7 C/L7 S/L3 D/L7 C/L7 S/L3 D/L7 S/L3 D/L7
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

8 D/L4 C//L0 C/L8 D/L4 D/L8 C/L8 D/L4 D/L8 D/L4 D/L8
w

p
w

n
9 S/L4 C/L1 C/L9 S/L4 D/L9 C/L9 S/L4 D/L9 S/L4 D/L9
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

10 D/L5 C/L2 C/L10 D/L5 D/L10 C/L10 D/L5 D/L10 D/L5 D/L10
t.c

w
w

f
11 --- C/L3 C/L11 S/L5 D/L11 C/L11 S/L5 D/L11 S/L5 D/L11
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

12 C/L0 C/L4 P0 D/L6 C/L0 C/L12 D/L6 P0 D/L6 D/L12

w

p
w
p

13 C/L1 C/L5 P1 S/L6 C/L1 C/L13 S/L6 P1 S/L6 D/L13

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

C/L2 C/L6 P2 D/L7 C/L2 C/L14 D/L7 P2 D/L7 D/L14

t.
14

w
w

p
w

f
n

15 C/L3 C/L7 P3 --- C/L3 C/L15 --- P3 S/L7 D/L15

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
16 C/L4 P0 P4 C0/L0 C/L4 C/L16 P0 P4 D/L8 D/L16

p
w

ft
w

.u
17 C/L5 P1 P5 C1/L1 C/L5 C/L17 P1 P5 S/L8 D/L17
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
18 P0 P2 P6 C2/L2 C/L6 C/L18 P2 P6 D/L9 D/L18
w
w

ft

19 P1 P3 P7 C3/L3 C/L7 C/L19 P3 P7 S/L9 w

D/L19
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

20 P2 P4 P8 C4/L4 C/L8 C/L20 P4 P8 D/L10 D/L20

w

ft
w

li
w

21 P3 P5 P9 C5/L5 C/L9 C/L21 P5 P9 S/L10 D/L21

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

22 P4 P6 P10 C6/L6 C/L10 C/L22 P6 P10 D/L11 D/L22

w

ft

w
n

.u

23 P5 P7 P11 C7/L7 C/L11 C/L23 P7 P11 --- D/L23

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

Max.
ift

li
w
.u

N° 6 8 12 8 12 24 8 12 12 24
.c

p-
w
w

STOPS
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

LEGEND
p-
w
p-

ft

C/Ln = call push button at landing ‘n’ placed in car with its light
n
n

.u

.c
li
w

D/Ln =Call down push button at landing ‘n’ placed at landing

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

S/Ln =Call up push button at landing ‘n’ placed at landing

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

Pn = car (n) position light

p-
w
p-

ft

0 - 23 = I/O connectors on the control board

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

NOTE : Pn lamps can signal even the blinking arrival programming the values ‘0’ or ‘2’ (arrival+position) at the address
w
.u

.c
li
w

8 and programming ‘8’ or ‘12’ at the address 5 (blinking arrival) .

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

11
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w n -li

Serial
w f w p n

Parallel
p-
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .c

+
+
n -li .u w

Car
Car
w f n

serial
w p

Serial
p- w

DEC16
DEC16
Parallel
w Parallel
li .u t.c w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w

Single call
Single call
Single call
Single call

w li n -li

Dw reserved/
Dw reserved/
Dw reserved/
Dw reserved/

ft w p w

Up/Dw reserved
Up/Dw reserved
Up/Dw reserved
Up/Dw reserved

-li .u .c w ft w
Single call (only car)
Single call (only car)

ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
p- w f w p n w
+0
+8
+2
+4

w
+16
+24
+12
+18
+20
+28

li .u t.c w

12
w ft w p n -li .u
Address 61

.u .c w w ft w p
w n w
-li
f .u .c w
w
p- t.c w p n w
w li .u n w -li .u
.u
ft
.c w p- w ft w
n w li .u .c w
p-
p- w ft w p n w lif
.u .c w
+0
+4
+4
+0
+4
+4
+0
+0
+4
+4
+0
+0
+0
+4
+4

li n -li .u t.c
ft w p- w f w n
Address 13

.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w .u .c w
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---

-li
+2

w p- w f w p n
w .u t.c w
Address 63

w li n -li
ft w p w w
The table below describes the values to be set to the addresses 61, 13 and 63 to get the maps as per the table previous.

.u .c w ft
n w
-li
f .u .c w
p- t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
3.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
MULTIFUNCTION KEYPAD

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
DISP900

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w
The multifunction keypad DISP900 allows to configure all the parameters and function of the control board, allows to

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
dysplay and to manage the alarm information, allows to monitor the state (active or inactive) of some I/O signals. It is
.c

ft
w
possibile to mount the DISP900 keypad both in horizontal position and vertical position.

p
ft

-li
w
At address 98 it is possible to select the language for the programming Keypad DISP900: program value ‘0’ for Italian or

.u

.c
-li

w
value ‘1’ for English.

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
ADDRESS 98:

p
w

ft

-li
w
Set ‘0’ for italian language

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
Set ‘1’ for english language

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

Set ‘2’ for france language

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

LCD Display 16x2

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

MAN
w

p
w

n
NORM
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

PROG
t.c

Speedy Data Up Down

w
w

Push-Button

f
n

Switch

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
Programming Keypad DISP900
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

Control
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
Board
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
Micro

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

Programming Keypad in Vertical Position

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

Control
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Board
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

Micro

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c

Programming Keypad in Horizontal Position

li
w

p-

ft
w

13
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
3.1MULTIFUNCTION KEYPAD COMPONENTS

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
The multifunction keypad DISP900 is composed of:

t
lif
n

w
.u
 a 16x2 LCD display for the visualization of the informations;

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft
 a three positions switch that allows to select operative mode of the control board;

w
.u

.c
-li
w
 four multifunction push-buttons (SPEEDY, DATA, UP e DOWN) which allow the managment of programming

w
w

ft
w
operations and control board’s informations;

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
3.1.1 PRESET Switch
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

It allows to change the operational mode of the control board between “Running mode” (if placed in NORM position), in

ft
w

p
ft

n
“Programming mode” (if placet in PROG position) and in “Inspection mode” (if placed in MAN position).

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
Ref paragraph 3.2.3

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
3.1.2 DATA Push-Button

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

This push button performs the following functions:

p
w

ft
p


n

.u
If it is pressed during standard system working, it is possible to display IMMEDIATE INFORMATIONS, (

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
display the state of several signals). Ref paragraph 1.6
w

p
w

n


w
f

Pressed together with SPEEDY push button, allows the board last stored faults consultation. Ref. paragraph 1.3

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
In PRESET mode, that is during memory programming (Programming mode), displays the current data stored in

p
w
w

f
n

.u
memory at a specific address. Ref. paragraph 3.2.3

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

3.1.3 SPEEDY Push-Button

cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

This push button performs the following functions:

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

 During permanent halt, allows the system manual unblocking (after solving the fault reason). Ref. paragraph 1.2
w

p
w

n

f

Pressed together with DATA push button, allows the board last stored faults consultation. Ref. paragraph 1.3
n

.u

t.c
-li
w


t.c

w
During PRESET mode, that is during memory programming (programming mode), if pressed together with UP or

w
w

f
n

DOWN push button, allows to speed up the flow of the parameter list to reach faster the desired parameter (speeding

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

up the flowing of displaied numbers). Ref. paragraph 3.2.3

w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

3.1.4 UP Push-Button
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

This push button performs the following functions:

t.c
-li

p
w
p

 During PRESET mode, that is during memory programming (programming mode), increases the value on the
f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
display. Ref paragraph 3.2.3.

w
w

p
w

f
n

 In Inspection mode, this push button moves the car in UP direction. Ref paragraph 9.6

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

 If pressed in Running Mode it activates an automatic call to the top floor if the board is programmed for single call
w

p
w

ft
w

mode or for collective mode. If the board is programmed for “Man-Present” operation it moves the car in up direction
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

until the car reaches the top floor or until the push button is released.

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

3.1.5 DOWN Push-Button

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

This push button performs the following functions:

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

 During PRESET mode, that is during memory programming (programming mode), decreases the value on the w
n

.u

.c
li
w

display. Ref paragraph 3.2.3

.c

w
p-

ft
w

 In Inspection mode, this push button moves the car in DOWN direction. Ref paragraph 9.6
ift

li
w
.u

.c

 If pressed in Running Mode it activates an automatic call to the lowest floor if the board is programmed for single
p-
w
w

ft

call mode or for collective mode. If the board is programmed for “Man-Present” operation it moves the car in up
n

.u

.c
li
w

direction until the car reaches the lowest floor or until the push button is released.
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

14
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
3.2SYSTEM’S OPERATIVE MODES OVERVIEW

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
The multifunction Keypad DISP900 permits to manage the operative mode of the control board and to display useful

t
lif
n

w
informations:

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft
 Start-up: in this working mode you can check the firmware version installed in the microcontroller.

w
.u

.c
-li
w
 Running Mode: you can monitor in real time the state (active or inactive) of inputs RS, RD, IF and ICV, you can

w
w

ft
w

p
have informations on working time of the systems, on system code number (if one had been assigned with the

-li
w
.u

.c
supervision software), on current position and next destination of the car.

p
w

ft
 Programming Mode: in this working mode you can program the various parameters and functions of the control

n
n

.u

.c
-li
board. w
.c

ft
w
 Inspection Mode: you can enter inspection mode and move the car using the the switch and the push-buttons on the

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

multifunction keypad DISP900.

p
w

ft

n
 Alarm Check Mode: you can check the alarm archive stored in the control board memory.
p

.u

.c
-li
w
 Input Status Check: you can monitor the state of some input signals of the control board.
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
The figure below shows the state transition of the informations displayed on the multifunction keypad’s display.
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

Control board
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Power on
t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f

Start Up
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

Firmware version installed in

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

the microcontroller of the

w

p
control board
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

MAN MAN
p

NORM NORM
n

.u
Programming
-li
w

Inspection Mode PROG Running Mode PROG

.u

t.c

Mode

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
System Serial Number w
f

.u

System in Inspection Mode Control Board’s Functions

.c
-li
w

Magnetic Sensors Monitoring

w
Inspection Mode Managment Programming

p
w

ft

System Status Monitoring

w

.u
li
w

MAN
.u

.c

MAN
p-

NORM

w
NORM
w

PROG
w

ft

PROG
w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
+
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

SPEEDY + DATA
.c

w
p-

or
w

Releasing
ft
w

Releasing
ift

Occurrence of an Keep
n

SPEEDY e DATO
li
w
.u

Alarm Pressed DATA

.c

p-
w

DATA Push-Button
w

ft

Push-Button
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

Status
p-

Alarm
w

ft

Visualization Visualization
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Monitoring Signals Status of

w

Visualization of Active Alarm

ft

li
w

the System
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

15
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
3.2.1 Start-Up

w
lif

.u

.c
When the control board is powered, the display on the multifunction keypad visualize the firmware version installed on

w
p-

t
the control board microcontroller.

lif
n

w
.u

.c
An example of the start-up screen is shown in figure below.

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c
V4.3.XXX

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
Firmware

p
w

ft

n
p

Version
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
3.2.2 Running Mode

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

In running mode, you can monitor in real time on the display the state of inputs RS, RD, IF e ICV (0 = inactive and 1 =
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

active), you can have informations on working time of the systems and on system code number (if one had been assigned

w
w

p
w

n
with the supervision software).

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Also you can check the current position and next destination of the car (blinking signalling). If the car is idle and there

p
w
w

aren’t other calls to serve, the field of the display reserved to the next destination signalling remains off and only the
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

current position is visualized.

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

Status of

w
0 = Inactive

w
System Serial Number
w

inputs
p

f
n

(max 8 characters) RS RD IF ICV 1 = Active

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
MATrXXXX1011
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Uni 10
w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

Status Code

f
n

-li
w
f

Current
.u

t.c
-li

Destination Floor Floor

w

p
w

(Blinking)
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

In the table below are listed the inputs’ active state codes that are displayed during the normal working of the system.
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w

CODE DESCRIPTION
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ALT ALT input signal interrupted.

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

FCM CM input signal interrupted. Photodetector interrupted.

w
p-

ft
w

PAP PAP input signal active. Door Opening Push-Button pushed.

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

PCP PCP input signal active. Door Closing Push-Button pushed.

w
w
w

ft

CCS CCS input signal active. Overload active. w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

CCC input signal active. Full Load sensor active. Note: this code is displayed only if the Full Load check
w

ft
w

CCC
ift

function is enabled programming at address 6 the value ‘32’ or ‘48’.

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

CCO input signal active. Movable Platform active. Note: this code is displayed only if the Movable
w

ft

CCO
n

Platform check function is enabled not programming at address 63 the value ‘+1’
.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

SOS Alarm Push-button pressed.

ft

li
w
.u

EMP EM input signal active. System in Emergency mode.

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

PSM PSM input signal active. Up direction movement (in inspection mode) push-button pressed.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

PDM input signal active. Down direction movement (in inspection mode) push-button pressed.
.c

PDM
p-

ft
w
w

ft

MAN MAN input signal active. System in Inspection mode.

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

CEP (FS3) signal active. Displayed only if the fire service mode or the firefighters service mode are
w
p-

ft

CEP
n

active
.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

INT INT input signal active.

w
w

ft

w
.u

Duplex System. Note: this code is displayed only if Duplex funcion is enabled (programming at address
.c
li
w

63 the value ‘+4’) and if the system is really communicating with the other system connected with the
p-

DUP
w

ft
w

apposite duplex cable.

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

BVS Low Speed in Up direction

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

AVS High Speed in Up direction

p-

ft
w

16
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
BVD Low Speed in Down direction

w
lif

.u

.c
AVD High Speed in Down direction

w
p-

t
lif
COL Collective Calls system.

w
.u

.c

p-
UNI Automatic Single Calls system

w
w
w

ft

n
‘Man Present’ Operation

w
UOM

.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
The priority of the code visualization follow the same order of the table above. The codes that fill the highest position of

w
.u

.c

w
the table have a priority higher than the ones that fill the lowest position in the same table. For example if both the CM

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
input signal and the PCP input signal are active, the code FCM will be displayed.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
3.2.3 Programming Mode

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
In Programming Mode is possible to set up the control board with all the function needed from the system.
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

To enter in Programming Mode, the system must be stopped and the push-button of the keypad DISP900 (SPEEDY,
.c

ft
w

p
DATA, UP and DOWN) must be inactive.
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

The programming mode is activated moving the switch on the keypad in PROG position. In programming mode the

p
w
system remains blocked with the “reserved” signal on.

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

In programming mode, in the field of the display reserved to the input state code, will be visualized the string PAR
t.c

w
w

p
(PARAMETER) followed by the last address’ number checked in the last board programming. If, in the meantime, a
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

power outage had occurred will be displayed the number of the first address (00).

p
w
w

Now it is possible to reach the parameter that has to be visualized and setted using the UP and DOWN Push-buttons.
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Pushing together UP or DOWN push-button and SPEEDY, the scrolling of the parameter list can be speeded up.
t.c

w
w

p
w

When the desired address is reached, it is possible to display the setted value pushing the DATA push-button: in the field

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

of the display reserved to the state code is visualized the string VAL (VALUE) and in the next numeric field is visualized

w
w
w

the value currently setted in the selected parameter. Thi value can be modified keeping pushed the DATA button and
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

pressing the UP or DOWN push button to select the new value. When the desired value had been reached, it is necessary
t.c

p
w

to release the DATA button, the selected value will blink three times and the new value will be memorized in memory.

n
f
n

.u
Keep one finger’s on DATO button to modify the value and press UP or DOWN button to select the new setting. When

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

the desired value is reached release the DATO button, if the memorization is correct the display will blink 3 times with
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

the correct value.

t.c
-li

w
Whenever the new value is wrong, the last value stored will remain and it will be displayed the fault code ‘58’ (for

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
functions) and code ‘59’ (for stops number < 2 or > 16).When modifying “Programmable Times”, if a value is out of

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

range, the default value (shown in the previous table) is set automatically.
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

At the end, exit from program mode, moving the switch on DISP900 in NORM position, the plant is operative with the
t.c
-li

p
w

new settings (no power supply off is needed).

p

f
n

.u
-li
w

Each control board is pre-programmed with default values (default configuration), shown on previous tables.
.u

t.c

t.
w
In the figure below is represented the state diagram of the programming procedure and some example display’s screens in
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

the differ programming phases.

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

MATrXXXX1011
p

New Value
n

.u
li
w

programmed in the
.u

Current
.c

Uni 0
p-

w
selected parameter.
w

Floor
w

ft

It will blink 3 times to

n

w
.u

confirm that the new

.c
li
w

value had been

w
p-

MAN
w

ft

Switch = PROG
w

NORM accepted
n

PROG Enter in Programming Mode

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

MATrXXXX1011 MATrXXXX1011 MATrXXXX1011

.c
li
w

Pressing Releasing
.c

w
p-

ft

DATA DATA
w

PAr 00 VAL 00 VAL 02

ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

PAR = Parameter VAL = Value Value programmed in

n

.u

.c
li
w

Current Selected the selected parameter

.c

p-

Parameter
ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

MATrXXXX1011
w
p-

ft

PAr 00
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Press UP or DOWN + DATA

w

ft

Press UP or DOWN push-

n

Push-button to select the

li
w
.u

button to select the desired + Switch = NORM MAN

.c
li
w

new value that must be

p-

Esc from Programming NORM

parameter
w
p-

programmed
w

PROG
ft

+ + mode
+ +
n

.u

SPEEDY
li
w
.u

.c

Keep pressed the SPEEDY SPEEDY

p-

MATrXXXX1011
w

push-button to quickly go to Keep pressed the SPEEDY push-

w

ft

button to quickly go to desired

w

desired value
.u

Uni 0
.c
li
w

value
w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

17
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
3.2.4 Inspection Mode

w
lif

.u

.c
With the multifunction keypad DISP900 is possibile to manage the Inspection Mode. Ref Paragraph 9.6.

w
p-

t
To enter in Inspection Mode it is necessary to move the switch on DISP900 in MAN position. In Inspection Mode, in the

lif
n

w
.u
field of the display reserved to the state code is visualized the code ‘MAN’. Now using SPEEDY+UP and

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
SPEEDY+DOWN push buttons is possible to move the car respectively in up and in down direction.

w
.u

.c
-li
w
Pushing the SPEEDY+UP push button the car will move in up direction and in the field of the display reserved to the

w
w

ft
w

p
state code will be visualized the code PSM (Up Direction in Inspection Mode active).

-li
w
.u

.c
Pushing the SPEEDY+DOWN push button the car will move in up direction and in the field of the display reserved to the

p
w

ft

n
state code will be visualized the code PDM (Down Direction in Inspection Mode active).
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
In the figure below is resumed the Inspection Mode management made through the DISP900 keypad and some example
ft

-li
w
.u
display’s screens in the differ Inspection Mode’s phases.

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
MATrXXXX1011

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
Uni 0
w

ft
Current Floor
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
Switch = MAN MAN MAN Switch = NORM

w
f

.u
NORM NORM

t.c
-li
w

System in INSPECTION Mode PROG

System in RUNNING Mode
PROG

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
+

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

Keep pressed

w
Keep pressed

w
SPEEDY+ UP
w

SPEEDY+ DOWN

f
n

Push-Button

-li
w
.u

Push-Button
t.c

MATrXXXX1011 MATrXXXX1011 MATrXXXX1011

w

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
PDM 0 MAn 0 PSM 2
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

DOWN Direction Command Release Release UP Direction Command

f

Plant stopped in
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

in Inspection mode DOWN INSPECTION mode UP in Inspection mode

t.c

w
active Push-Button Push-Button active
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
3.2.5 Alarm Mode

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

When a fault occurs, in the field of the display reserved to the state code will be visualized the string ‘ERR’ (ERROR)
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
and in the next number is show the error code. For a complete description of the Alarm Mode management and of alarm
n

-li
w
f

.u

codes’ meaning refer to chapter 1.

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

Pressing the DATA and SPEEDY push buttons simultaneously you can read a brief description of the meaning of the
p

.u
li
w
.u

fault. The description of the fault is on two pages that are rotated and the bottom of the second page shows a two-digit
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

number representing the time in hours elapsed since the previous failure.
n

w
.u

.c

In the figure below are shows some example display’s screen when an alarm occurs.
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

18
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

n
MATrXXXX1011

w
lif

.u

.c

w
Current

p-
Uni 0

t
Floor

lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w Occurrence SPEEDY + DATA

w
w
of an Alarm

ft
Visualization of Alarm Code
w
+ Alarm

n
and Alarm Description

-li
Code

w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
MATrXXXX1011 A81-alarm
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

description

w
err 81 00

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
ERR = Error Releasing

p
w

ft

n
+
p

SPEEDY + DATA
n

.u
Time (hours)

.c
Alarm

-li
w
.u

.c

Code elapsed since the

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
previous Alarm

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
Keep pressed

ft
p

SPEEDY for

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

3 seconds

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

MATrXXXX1011

p
w
w

f
uni 0
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
3.2.6 Input State Check
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

It is possibile to visualize on the display a state code with a short description of its meaning. This code shows if a
t.c

p
particular signal or function is active. Ref Paragraph 1.6.
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

To visualize the state code it is necessari to push, in Running Mode or in Inspection Mode, the DATA push button.
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

MATrXXXX1011
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Uni 0
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
Release

p
Keep
w

ft
w

DATA

.u
Pressed
li
w
.u

.c

Push-button
p-

DATA

w
w
w

ft

Push-button
w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

S41-ALT Pressed
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

19
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
3.3PROGRAMMING WRITING PROTECTION

w
lif

.u

.c

w
THROUGH PASSWORD

p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
It’s possibile to set up a password through a supervision software, which enables to protect programming parameters

ft
w

-li
from writing.In order to be input through a push-button of the keypad DISP900, the password must only have numbers,

w
.u

.c

w
otherwise it is possible to unlock it by supervision software.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
In order to block all programming parameters, you must set a password made up of 5 figures (ex.0123) through the

.c
-li
w
.c

supervision software.

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
Once the password is set, it is possible to input it through push-button of the keypad DISP900 in the proper parameters

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
(ind. 47-48-49).

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
For instance, if the previus password corresponds to 0123, you must program index 49 to “01” and index 48 to “23”.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
4 FIGURES PASSWORD

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
BLOCK ALL PARAMETERS 47-48-49
w

p
w

w
f

INDEX 49 48 47

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
VALUE 01 23 45

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
Everytime you go back to programming, the password will be required.
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li

By setting a password made up of 6 figures it is possible ti protect only those parameters related to the counting of the
w

w
w
w

hours for six-monthly check (index 47-48-49).

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

If you wont blocking only index 47,48 and 49 ,you must set a password by supervision software (ex 012345).
t.c

p
To unlock these index by push-button of the keypad DISP900 you must set up the access code in the proper parameters.
w

n
f
n

.u
For instance if the previus password corrisponds to 012345, you must program index 49 to “01, index 48 to “23” and

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
index 47 to “45”.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

6 FIGURES PASSWORD
t.c
-li

p
w

BLOCK ONLY PARAMETERS 47-48-49

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

INDEX 49 48 47
t.c

w
w

VALUE 01 23 45
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

Fault 57 means that the password is wrong.

p

f
n

.u
-li
w

Setting a blank space “ ” as a new password by supervision software, the password is deactivated.
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

PASSWORD DESCRIPTION
w

p
w

ft

“ ” BLANK SPACE
w

PASSWORD DEACTIVATED
p

.u
li
w
.u

Numeric (4 figures) Block all parameters, it is possibile unlock from the push button of the keypad DISP900.
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

Numeric (6 figures) Block some parameters, it is possibile unlock from the push button of the keypad DISP900.
n

w
.u

.c
li
w

“0000” or “000000” Block only the supervision, it is unlock from the control board.
w
p-

ft
w

Alphanumeric Block only the supervision.

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

20
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
3.4PROGRAMMING BY PC

w
lif

.u

.c

w
For programming the memory, in alternative to procedure described at the paragraph 3.2.3, it’s possible use a Personal

p-

t
lif
n
Computer, with the proper supervision software. It’s can also monotoring all Inputs and outputs of the control board.

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w PC

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c
COMMUNICATION

p
w

ft

n
CHANNELS
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

Control board

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
This system is capable of performing the following steps:

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w

w

Reading and programming the memory of the control panel (Times, Functions and Parameters);
p

f
n

.u
-li
 w
.u

Reading and programming the memory of the control panel (Times, Functions and Parameters);
t.c

w
w
 Consultation of the last 32 faults reported by the control board;

p
w

w
f


cn

.u
Removal of the faults reported in the control board;

t.c
-li
w

w
 Real-time visualization of the state of all inputs and outputs;

w
w

f
n

 Real-time graphical representation of the car and the elevator shaft

-li
w
.u

t.c

 Making calls remotely

w

p
w

n
 Implementation of the 'manual release' plant in case of permanent damage (after resolving the cause of the
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

blockage)
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

The control board is able to handle different types of connection to the PC and then different types of
w

p
w

communication channels:

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
 Local connection: in this case you will not need to use any modem but the connection between the control board
w

f
n

-li
w
f

and the PC can be done with a special 3-wire cable that connects to a PC COM port with 9-pin connector on the
.u

t.c
-li

w
card control. Code: CB_VG0056_01 (2mt.)

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
Board
w
PC
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
DB9-F
DB9-F

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

Pin-out
w

ft
w

li
w

CN2-3
.u

CN1-2
.c

.
p-

w
w

CN1-3 CN2-2
w

ft

w
n

.u

CN1-5 CN2-5
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft


n

Connection via GSM modem: if the remote connection, if you do not have access to a telephone line you can
n

.u

.c
li
w

use a GSM modem connected to the 9-pin connector on the control card via cable. (See brochure supervision)
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

For more information you can see the user manual of supervision software.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

Note:
p-
w
p-

ft

If you use the monitoring software for the PC to the previous version V.4.3.0, set +16 at
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

address 90 of the control board.

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

21
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
4.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
CONTROL BOARD

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
CHARACTERISTICS

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
4.1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w


.u
Dimensions: 150 x 255 mm

.c
-li

w


p
Weigh: 400 g.

ft

n
p

.u
 Control board’s software: SW is contained into a removable and reprogrammable microprocessor with FLASH

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
technology.

p
w

ft

-li
w
 Setting plant’s parameters and faults list: board totally programmable by a removable display (DISP900) or via

.u

.c
-li
w

p
Computer both in local or remote mode (with a modem board). Parameters are stored thanks to EEPROM and so the

ft
p

.u
control board doesn’t lose its programming even when there is a power off.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
 Compliance with safety’s circuits rules: the board is compliance with UNI EN 81-1/2 Standard currently in force.
w

p
w

w
f

4.2 ELECTRIC CHARACTERISTICS

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
4.2.1 Power Supplies
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

 Power supply: Provide a continuous voltage at connectors GND and CL obtained rectifying an alternate voltage in
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

the range that goes from 13Vac ± 10% to 25Vac ± 10%.

t.c

p
w

n

f

Power supply with battery: at the connector BAT has to be connected at the battery of 12V to keep enable the
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
alarm and emergency’s functions even if power supply turn off. Ref. Paragraph 6.3

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u


t.c

Output power supply for subordinate boards and emergency devices: from connector VIM which supplys a
-li

p
w

n
voltage of 13.5 Vdc stablized and backed up with battery and a maximum current of 2A.
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

 Voltage reference point:

w
w

f
n

 GND is the zero reference for the board and the other external devices (lights, relais, subordinate

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

boards...Except safety circuits.

w

p
w
p


f
n

OM is the zero reference for the working voltage and safety circuits;

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
AL- is the zero reference for alarm circuit. After insulation tests, these connectors are to be connected

w
w

p
w

f
n

together and placed at ground.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w


ft
w

Temperature range: from 0°C to +50°C

p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

 Safety’s Voltage: 24Vdc to 110Vac (OPTIONAL: up to 230Vac.)

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

4.2.2 Inputs
w
p-

ft
w

li
w

All inputs, except that’s for checking on safety’s chains (optoisolated), must be connected towards the GND. They are
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

not damaged by voltages less than 24V. All inputs have LED signalling.
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

4.2.3 Outputs
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-

All transistor outputs close towards GND devices connected at 12 or 24 Vdc. The outputs take a maximum current of
w
w

ft

0.5A and are protected from short-circuit.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

The outputs for run contactors, for doors relays, for the OCC and the CE signals are relays contact which can take 5A
p-

ft
w
ft

max.
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

22
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
4.3 ELECTRICAL DRAWING

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
from 24V to 110V AC or DC

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
OM VM

w
.u

.c
-li
w
Serial Expansion

w
PTC EXC

ft
VIM
w
boards

n
14Vac ± Power supply CRP

-li
w
Interna

.u
10%

.c
l + 12V

w
¸ CL

p
w
14Vdc

ft

n
24Vac ± Regulator
n

.u
Safety chain

.c
-li
10% w
.c

Battery

ft
w
RAP

p
ft

Charg

n
Test AP

-li
w
2

.u
TST er

.c
2
-li

p
w

ft

n
P RAP
p

GND
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

- + C (CP/PATT)
.c

ft
w
P RCP

p
12V
w

ft

BAT

n
KBAT

-li
w
.u
EXC

.c
-li
w

RD

p
w

ft
External
RS
p

.u
door’s closing

-li
Main magnetic w ALT
.u

IF contacts
t.c

sensors DISP90

w
RAC*
w

p
0
w

ICV

n
CS

w
f

.u
CC

t.c
-li
w

w
Movable Safety

p
CC OM

w
Car Door
w

By-Pass
p

Platform

f
C
n

MAN

.u
circuit

-li
w
NORM CT
.u

CCS
t.c

Door open Speedy Dato Up Down PROG

w
Blocks
w
pushbutton PAP

p
TG
w

n
Door close TG TP

w
f
cn

.u
pushbutton PCP

t.c
-li
w

w
w
CM1
w

P TP
p

Photocell

f
n

TG

-li
s CM2 w NOTE:
.u

t.c

T *If there are swing door

w
INT/CM3 Inverter control ‘s

p
w

n
S TS landing and automatic
expansion board
f
n

.u
EM doors in the car.

t.c
-li
w

(Optional)
t.c

w
TSD

w
TD
w

TD

f
Contactors
n

CPP

-li
w
f

Check
.u

t.c
-li

APG
w

p
w

n
GND
up

+12V o +24V
f

MAN
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Inspection PS Insulation line OC

t.c

w
M (up to 3KV) C
w

f
n

PDM

-li
w
f

0
.u

Switch check/Timer2 FS3/

t.c
-li

External calls and

w
...
Motor Temp. CEP relative indication on

p
w
p

TM the same wire

f
n

.u
7
-li
w

Relevelling Zone
.u

t.c

APA

t.
Protections check/

w
w

Vmax = 35Vcc (peak)

w

f
Timer1
n

CS1 8

-li
w
f

.u

Alarm Ack Car calls and relative

.c
-li
w

AR ...
indication on the
w
Control

p
w

Alarm Reset
ft
w

RES 15 same wire

p

.u
Oil Temp.
li
w
.u

TO
.c

p-

16

Board w
w

... Position Indication

w

ft

23 w
.u

.c
li
w

w
FS
p-

AUX1/DATO
w

ft
w

FD
n

AUX2/SBL All Outputs are

li
w
.u

protected from
.c

.
AUX3/ SA
p-

w
w

PRE short circuit

w

ft

SAR
Imax = 0.5A w
n

.u

A
.c
li
w

AL+
.c

6V o 12V
w
p-

B
w

ft

Alarm
w
ift

AL- C Binary position

li
w
.u

.c

D
p-
w

DEX Safety chain check output /

w

Floors’ Serial RU
ft

Timer 1
n

.u

Connection KE PAT Retiring Cam / Third Access

.c
li
w

Forced closing doors / Timer

.c

p-

Serial Expansion CPF

w

GND
ft

3
w

boards Gon
ft

GN
n

li
w

Power supply VIM g

.u

.c

SNR
li

Overload Alarm
p-

RST AP
w

DIN Faul Read

p-

Open secon access

w

ft

Car’s Serial
n

Err 2
t y
n

.u

Connection KI SCP Segnalling car position

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

Reset
ft

PC Connection
w

Signalling
w

ft

Pushbutton
li
w

Leds
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

23
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
5.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
WIRINGS DESCRIPTION

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
5.10 – 23

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
Programmable Inputs/Outputs (multiplexed). Ref paragraph 2.5.

.u

.c
5.2A/B/C/D

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

Outputs for binary coded position/binary inverted code/Gray code. Vedere paragrafo 8.1.

ft
w

p
ft

n
5.3AL-/ AL+/ AR/ RES/ SA/ SAR

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

Alarm wiring:
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
 AL- : input for alarm push button;

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

 AL+: input for alarm push button;

p
w

ft
p

 AR: input for AKNOWLEDGED ALARM push button

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

 RES: input for ALARM RESET

w
w

p
w

n
 SA: input to signal SENT ALARM through a blinking light

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

 SAR:

p
w
w

f
-input to signal aknowledged alarm through a fixed light:
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

-is used for the signal of out of service. It’s active when the plant is in block, in maintainance and in programming.

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

NOTE if at address 49 is programmed a value > 90, SAR output is activated when expires the time for the six-monthly

w
w
w

f
n

check (4300 hours).

-li
w
.u

t.c

5.4 ALT
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

It is the input to control ALT signal

t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

When it is activated (ALT Open):

.u

t.c
-li

 breakdowns on safety chains;

w

p
w

n
up

 car stops, calls and reservations are cancelled(internal and landing ones);
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

 door closing is halted;

w
w

f
n

 relevelling is disabled;

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

 When it is deactivated (ALT Closed):

p

f
n

.u
-li
w

 if car is next to door opening zone, the doors will be opened;

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

 if car isn’t next to door opening zone, car will keep up doors closed;
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

This signal may be used to control semiautomatic doors’ approach in hydraulic plant instead of PAP signal.
w

.u
li
w

5.5 AP/CP/CRP
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

Relays’ contacts of door

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w


n

AP: output for doors opening ( only for first entrance in the case of multi-entrances plants);
li
w
.u

.c

.

p-

w
CP: output for doors closing ;
w
w

ft

 CRP: doors’relays common input; it can be wired after ALT signal or before the safety circuit w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

However, door closing control and beginning door opening are activated only if ALT signal is active.
ift

li
w

5.6 AP2
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c

Output signals for the opening of second entrances in multi-access plant. Ref. Paragraph 6.13.6.
li
w
.c

p-

If the second access is not enabled (programming ‘1’ or ‘3’ at address 0) AP2 output is active when the inspection mode
ft
w
ft

li
w

is active.
.u

.c
li

p-
w

If there isn’t the second entrance (programming ‘1’ or ‘3’ at address 0), in hydraulic plant, with “man-present” mode
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c

enabled, the A2 output is activated to enable landing calls, that is when car is not occupied or a landing call is active. For
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

example, wiring this output (AP2) to INT input signal, this functionality could be used in order to obtain car calls in
w

ft

li
w

‘man-present’ mode and landing calls in single automatic mode.

.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

5.7 APA
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

This input signal defines 3 different zones:

w
w

ft

w
.u

.c

 Enabled door opening zone. Ref paragraph 7.7

li
w

w
p-

ft

 Relevelling zone (hydraulic plant only). Ref paragraph 9.1

w

li
w

 Pre-opening door zone. Ref paragraph 6.1

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

programming at address 62, the value ‘+8’ which enables this input signal control (only with DA-DB magnetic sensors).
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

24
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
In order to enable pre-opening door, it is necessary to program parameter at address 19 with a values >= ’70’ and at add.

w
lif

.u
62 with a ‘+16’ (now it is possible only in hydraulic plant).

.c

w
p-
IF ICV APA

t
IF ICV

lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u
STOP ZONE Slowing down zone

.c
Re-levelling zone

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
IF/ICV w DA/DB
.u

.c

w
layout

ft
layout
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
5.8APG

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
Input signal controls high speed’s contactor (TG) and door opening relay (AP).

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

It has to be closed to GND:

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

 When car runs at slow speed, otherwise the elevator is stopped, and fault ‘64’ is signalled.
t.c

w
w

p
 When car is stopped, otherwise fault ‘44’ is signalled.
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
It has to be opened:

w
w

f
n

 When car runs at high speed, that is when control board activates TG signal, otherwise lift is stopped signalling fault

-li
w
.u

t.c

‘65’.
w

p
w

n
 When control board commands door opening otherwise fault ‘55’ is signalled.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
5.9AUX1/AUX2/AUX3
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Reserved inputs.
w

p
w

n
5.10 BAT
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
It is the input to connect a 12V battery to keep enable the alarm and emergency’s functions even if power supply
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

switches off. Ref. Paragraph 6.3

w

p
w

5.11 CCO /CCC/ CCS

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
Inputs for the checking movable platform: busy car contact (CCO), car full load contact (CCC) and car overload contact
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

(CCS).
w

p
w

ft
w

CCS input is activated when this contact is opened if a ‘+32’ is programmed at address 62. Ref. Paragraph 7.5
p

.u
li
w
.u

CCS signal with MAN signal, is employed to activate “manual rescue operation”, Ref. Paragraph 9.6.1
.c

p-

w
w

5.12 CL
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

Is the input for the positive pole of the power supply voltage of the control board. Ref. Paragraph 4.2.
n

li
w

5.13 KE/ KI/ DEX/DIN

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c

Serial expansion board wiring connectors.

li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

 DIN/KI: data and clock for car serial board expansion communication (SERCAR, VEG0400, SERCAR_LCD…).
ift

li
w
.u

.c

 DEX/KE: data and clock for landing serial board expansion communication (FLOORDIS, VEG0400, VEG0700,
p-
w
w

ft

VEG800...)
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

Ref. Chapter 10
ft

li
w

5.14 CM1/CM2
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

Door Photodetector input signals for each entrance (entrance 1,and 2); Ref. paragraph 6.7
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

5.14.1 CM1
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

If the plant has manual doors and it is in ‘man-present’ mode CM1 signal works as the ALT signal:
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

 It stops the car

w
w
w

ft

 It cancels the current call

w
.u

.c
li
w

 It keeps the car busy

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-

To have the same kind of working in single call mode too, you have to program the “Man Present Mode” instead of the
w
w

ft

“Single Call Mode” and connect the INT input to GND. Ref. paragraph 5.27.
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

25
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
5.15 CPF

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
Multifunctional output:

t
lif
n

w
.u
 TMR3

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
CPF may be an output signal of a general purpose timer (TMR3, add.29), together with FS3 input signal. This timer

w
.u

.c
-li
w
(CHF add. 29) may be set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘95’ tenth of second.

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u
 High speed

.c

p
w

ft
Programming a value >= ’97’ at address 29 (CHF parameter), the CPF output signal drive the high speed (V2P).

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
High speed is the velocity of a run through 2 or more floors. This signal is activated when distance is higher then an
.c

ft
w

p
ft

interfloor distance and the elevator is not in synchronizing or inspection mode. For the slowing down action refer to

-li
w
.u

.c
‘programmable times’ table.
-li

p
w

ft

n
 Firefighters service mode
p

.u

.c
-li
w
Programming the CHF time (add. 29) at a value= ‘96’, the CPF output is used to enable forced closing and ringing.
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

Ref. paragraph 9.8.2

-li
w
.u

.c
 Signal of out of service
-li
w

p
w

ft
Programming the CHF time (add.29) at a value=’95’, the CPF output is used for the signal of out of service.It’s active
p

.u
-li
w
.u

when the plant is in block, in maintainance and in programming.

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
5.16 CPP
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

It is an input signal that controls slow speed contactor (TP) and door closing relay (CP).
t.c

w
w

p
w

w
It must be closed to GND:
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

 when there isn’t door closing command, otherwise fault ‘46’ is signalled.

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

It has to be opened:
t.c

w
 when car runs at slow speed, that is when lift control board activates TP signal, otherwise the elevator blocks with

p
w

n
f
n

.u
fault ‘53’;

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
 during door closing operation and when there is no sighnal on CS input, otherwise fault ‘54’ is generated. This type
w

f
n

-li
w
f

of control can be deactivated programming ‘0’ or ‘32’ at address 10, and, in this case, it is not necessary to connect a
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

contact of the door closing relay in series to the CPP input.

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

In Hydraulic plant if TST (add. 25) is programmed with an odd value < 70 CPP input is checked before the activation of
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

TS contactor.
t.c
-li

w
5.17 CS

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
This signal has to be wired after door’s contacts. When manoeuvre voltage is present, doors are certainly closed and so
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

lift control board can activate run contactor.

.c
-li
w

p
If this connector keep opened for a time longer than the non-starting time (TMP, add. 21) since the door closing started,
w

ft
w

.u
li
w

lift control board:

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

 signals the blinked current car position (fault ‘0’-‘31’);

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

 opens the doors;

w
p-

ft
w

 cancels all reserved calls;

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

This procedure is followed also when car stop out of landing, with exception of door opening.
w

ft

If non-starting car happens during synchronizing operation, fault ‘45’ is signalled. w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

Anyway, It is possible try again pressing any call button.

ft
w
ift

5.18 CS1
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

Multifunctional input:
.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

 TMR1
ft

li
w
.u

.c

CS1 may be an input signal of a general purpose timer (TMR1), together with RU output signal. This timer may be
li

p-
w
p-

set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘98’ tenth of second.

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

 Safety circuit’s control

p-

ft
w
w

ft

CS1 can be input for safety circuit’s control not programming ‘+4’ at address ‘62’ (in this way the general purpose
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

timer TMR1 is not available). When this control is activated and CS1 is opened, relevelling is disabled. Ref.
p-

ft
n

.u

paragraph 7.1
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

 Unlocking brake’s control

w

ft

w
.u

In rope plant, if TMR1 (address 31) is set to the value ‘99’, the unlocking brake’s check is enabled. In fact CS1 is
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

active (closed) when brake is unlocked.

n

li
w
.u

During halt operation, contactors go off after a programmable time at address 26 (TRIF) from CS1 opening.
.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

26
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
5.19 CT

w
lif

.u

.c

w
Contactors’ common (D, S, P, G). Must be wired to the safety chain end. If it keep opened, TS and TD contactors cannot

p-

t
lif
n

w
be activated.

.u

.c

p-

w
5.20 EM

w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
Input for emergency service activation, that is when there is a power cut.

ft
w

n
In Normal mode EM input must be closed to prevent plant blocking with fault ‘81’. Ref. paragraph 9.2

-li
w
.u

.c
5.21 EXC

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

Overrun control input. Must be wired at the beginning of safety chain, preceded only by overrun sensors.

ft
w

p
ft

n
If this contact opens, plant blocks permanently with fault ‘81’ only if emergency or inspection services are not active.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

The following situations can happen:

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
 If immediate blocking is programmed (‘4’ or ‘12’ at add. 5): plant blocks promptly with fault ‘81’ and car keeps

-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
stopped even if EXC contact closes in the meantime.

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

 If blocking after the automatic landing 0 reaching is programmed (‘0’ and or ‘8’ at add. 5):

p
w

ft
p

 Hydraulic plant: if the car halts at landing different from floor 0, If runs to reach landing 0 (if EXC closes in
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

the meantime) and then it keeps blocked with fault ‘81’.

w
w

p
w

n
 Traction/rope plant: the system is blocked immediately with fault ‘81’ and the car keeps blocked until EXC

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

closing (not permanently halt).

p
w
w

5.22 FD/FS

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
Outputs that command the signalling of up/down run direction or next run direction (up/down arrows).

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

5.23 FS3

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

Multifunctional input:
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

 TMR3
t.c

w
w
w

FS3 may be the input signal of a general purpose timer together with CPF output signal. This timer (CHF add.29)

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

may be set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘95’ tenth of second. Ref. paragraph 6.15
t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

 Firefighters service mode (EN81 – 72 – July 2003) only for firefighters lifts
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

Setting CHF (address ‘29’) at the ‘96’ value:

w
w

f
n

-li
Forced closing and alarm horn are activated on CPF output. w
f

.u

t.c
-li

 FS3 is used like Phase 1 (Ref. paragraph 9.8.2) activation command: ‘priority recall for the firefighters lift’.
w

p
w
p

 FS3 + INT are used like Phase 2 (Ref. paragraph 9.8.2) activation commands: ‘use of the lift under
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
firefighters control’.

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
Check of the second key in car with CM3 (INT). w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

 Fire service mode

w

.u
li
w

Setting CHF (address 29) at the ‘97’ or ‘98’ value, FS3 is set like input to allow FIRE SERVICE MODE. When
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

the signal is activated, the current active call is completed, then all reservations are cancelled and a call to the NPM
ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

floor is activated (add. 39). Ref. paragraph 9.8.1.

w
p-

ft
w

 An important contact’s control

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
Contact wired to FS3 connector has to change at least one time during a complete run from the lower (RD sensor) to
w
w

ft

the upper (RS sensor) landing. In order to activate the switching control, it is necessary program the CHF time (addr w
n

.u

.c
li
w

29) at the ‘99’ value. If the switching not occurs fault ‘57’ is generated. This fault is excluded in emergency mode or
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

if phasing sensors (RS or RD) are out of order.

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

5.24 GND
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

This input is the reference electric potential (Zero voltage) for the power supply and for the signalling lights. It is
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

physically separated from OM to simplify the insulation test.

w
p-

ft

5.25 GN
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

GONG impulse output signal. Ref. paragraph 6.8

n

li
w
.u

.c

5.26 ICV/IF
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

Input signals of stopping and speed change/landing counter sensors.

.c

p-

w
w

They are active when they are opened or closed in function of parameter’s value at address 15 (‘0’ - opened at landing,
w

ft

w
.u

‘64’- closed at landing). At address 14 can be selected the placement layout (DA/DB or IF/ICV) of the magnetic sensors
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

(value ‘0’ or ‘16’ for DA/DB layout, value ‘32’ or ‘48’ for IF/ICV). Ref. paragraph 6.5
w

li
w
.u

Their arrangement in the hoistway is shown in the figure below:

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

27
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
IF ICV DA DB

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
STOPPING RELEVELLING SLOWING DOWN

.u

.c
-li
w Zone Zone Zone

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
IF/ICV DA/DB

-li
w
.u
layout layout

.c
-li

5.27 INT

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Input for the control of “Jnternal mode” (ref paragraph 9.4) or for the safety reopening systems/photodetector of the third
.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
entrance (if the third entrance is enabled programming address 3 with value 64). Ref paragraph 6.7.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
If the third entrance is disable ( programming ‘0’ at address 3), INT signal enables different functions depending from the
p

.u
-li
w
.u

type of connection and the programming of the “Man Present” mode (address 63):
t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

 If “man-present” service is activated:

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
 If INT is always closed to GND: car and landing calls are managed like single call plant’s ones.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
 If INT is closed to GND when car is not busy: car calls are served like “man-present” service’s ones and

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
landing calls are served like single call plant’s ones. In order INT input is closed to GND when car is not
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
reserved, it is possible to wire this connector to:

t.c
-li
w

w
 A presence in car sensor (car busy sensor);

w
w

f
n

 A car call push buttons circuit properly configured

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
 AP2 output, that, in this condition, is active (closed to GND) when plant is not reserved or when a landing

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

call is active.
t.c

w
w
 If INT is always opened: car and landing calls are managed like “man-present” service’s one.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

If “Man Present” service is not enabled and the third access is not enabled too, INT is the “Internal Mode” activation
w

p
w

n
up

input. INT activation deletes landing calls, keeps car busy with open door and only one internal call at time is served.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

5.28 MAN
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Input for the Inspection mode activation. Normally the Inspection mode is enabled closing this input to GND but it is
w

p
w

programmable active opened (normally closed) setting value ‘+1’ at address 62. Ref. paragraph 9.6
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

5.29 OCC
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c

Output for the ‘reserved’ car signalling’s lights (used in single call systems only). Ref. paragraph 8.5
-li
w

p
w

ft

5.30 OM
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

Zero voltage (reference voltage) of car manoeuvre voltage. Ref paragraph 4.2.1
ft

w
.u

5.31 PAP
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

Door opening or call cancellation push button input signal. Door opening is enabled if the car is still in the door zone and
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

if run has not yet begun. It is enabled in Inspection mode too if CS contact is opened.
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c

In hydraulic plant with semiautomatic doors, in order to guarantee car relevelling, use PAP connector to check the
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

external doors closing contact instead of ALT connector (wiring is shown in the picture).
w
ift

li
w

If the door closing relay RAcc is deactivated, PAP contact is closed and door are kept opened, otherwise PAP is opened.
.u

.c

p-
w

For PAP input there are two distinct rebound times: the rebound time for the activation of the input and the rebound time
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c

for the deactivation of the input. The activaqtion rebound time is programmable at address 46 (LETT parameter). The
li
w
.c

p-

ft

deactivation rebound time has a fixed value of 1 second. This function is useful when the PAP input is used to monitor
w
ft

li
w

the external doors’ closing contact.

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

In collective calls systems, if this input remains active for a time longer than 3 seconds, all car reservations are cancelled.
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

Car
w

ft

Extern doors
n

Doors Blocks
.u

Closing Contacts
.c
li
w

Contacts
w
p-

PAP
ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

RAcc
p-

RAcc
w
w

ft

ALT CS
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

28
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
5.32 PAT

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
It is the output signal for the retiring cam. This input is active at the run beginning (for call or Inspection starting). It

t
lif
n

w
enables the locks of external door, even if the car door is still opened. This output is deactivated in stopping zone.

.u

.c

p-

w
5.33 PCP

w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
Input for the door closing push button. When Pressing this button (or any other car call button) the waiting time with door

ft
w

-li
opened is resetted, doors close immediately and car starts.

w
.u

.c

w
Programming an odd value at the add. 30 (RIP), PCP can be used even like SAP function (opening exclusion to test the

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
system). Ref. paragraph 6.12.2

.c
-li
w
.c

In the follow situations PCP input is able to activate FIRE SERVICE MODE:

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
 The Fire Service Mode is activated (that is at add. 39 (NPM) is programmed a value < ‘32’).

.c
-li

p
w


ft

n
Is not used the FS3 input to activate this operation (fire service mode).
p

.u

.c
-li
w
5.34 PDM/PSM
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
Input signals for up and down direction push button (in Inspection Mode), placed above the car. Ref. paragraph 9.6

.c
-li
w

p
5.35 RD/RS
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Input signals for lower and upper landing syncronising sensors. They are active when they are OPENED.

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Placed only at extreme floors and some centimeters after the ICV sensors (that marks the slowing down zone).

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
RD sensor must to be placed at the lowest landing and RS at the highest one.
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

These sensors’ malfunctioning is shown with the following fault code:

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
 fault ‘41’: if both sensors are opened. This check is done at all times and in any car position.

w
w

f
n

 fault ‘54’: if car reaches the upper landing and RS is closed, lift ends the stopping and it will automatic go to the

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
lower floor. the next time the car reaches the upper landing, if RS sensor is still closed, the system is blocked .

p
w

n
f

 fault ‘55’: when occurs the same situation of fault ‘54’ but referred to the RD sensor. This means that RD sensor is
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
always closed and car reaches lower landing.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

These sensors are also used for the run direction checking. Ref. paragraph 7.4
w

p
w

n
5.36 RU
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

Multifunction output signal:

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

 TMR1
w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
RU may work as output signal for TMR1 (at add. 31), together with CS1 input signal. This timer (L13 add. 31) may
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
be set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘95’ tenth of second. Ref. paragraph 6.15.

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

 Enabling relevelling command

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

With DA/DB magnetic sensors’ layout, RU is used as relevelling enable command, programming L13 Timer at
w

.u
li
w

value ‘96’ or without programming ‘+4’ at the add. 62.

.u

.c

p-

w
w

 Programming the value ‘97’ at address 31, the RU output reports the presence of the IF signal or ICV signal. This
w

ft

w
.u

function can be used to activate one of the safety circuit’s channel that enables the relevelling operation in the door’s
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

zone. Ref. Paragraph 9.1

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

 Activation of the safety circuit

w
w
w

ft

Both in hydraulic and rope systems the RU output can be used to activate the safety circuit. Programming the value w
n

.u

.c
li
w

‘98’ at address 31 The RU output is activated in the door’s opening zone if the input APA is active (adding ‘+8’ at
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

address 62), otherwise is actifìvated when the stop zone is reached. Can be enabled the check of the safety circuit on
li
w
.u

.c

p-

CS1 input adding the value ‘+4’ at address 62.

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

 Inverter motion’s activation command

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft

RU is used as inverter speed benchmark’s activation command, programming L13 timer (add. 31) at the value ‘99’.
w
ft

li
w
.u

This output is activated at the starting after break opening (checked by CS1 input) and is deactivated promptly when
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

the car enters in stop zone. Motor contactors deactivation is delayed of TRIF time after CS1 input deactivation. Ref.
n
n

.u

.c
li
w

paragraph 6.17
.u

.c

p-

ft

5.37 SCP
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

Output signals for the “Car at Floor Signalling” or for the opening signal of the third entrances in multi-access plant. Ref.
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w

Paragraph 6.12.6.
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

If there isn’t the third entrance, programming ‘0’ at the address ‘3’, SCP output does the car at landing signalling both
ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

in rope and in hydraulic plant and even with ‘Man Present’ mode enabled, This output is activated at every floors in
w
p-

ft
w

the stop zone indipendently from floors count inputs’ setting, from wiring kind (parallel or serial) and from stop delay
n

li
w
.u

.c

(TRIF) value. In rope plant can be used as inverter stop control but PAY ATTENTION to enable the signal only at
p-
w
w

ft

arrival landing.
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

29
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
In the event that the number of floor (ind. 32) is> 16 the output “SCP” is used for binary code.

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-
5.38 SNR

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
Alarm sound’s output signal. SNR is activated in these three situations:

w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w
 when car is overloaded (CCS is active) for 2 seconds;

w
w

ft
w
 at the end of emergency service mode (when car is stopped and reserved in door opening zone and ALT signal is

-li
w
.u

.c
active with maintenance service mode deactivated);

p
w

ft
 impulsive sound when a car call button is pressed (“Beep” if ‘2’ or ‘3’ is programmed at address 0).

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
5.39 TD/TS
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

Output signals that command down direction (TD) and up direction (TS) run contactors.

p
w
5.40 TG

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
High speed output signal (TG relay).

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
5.40.1 TG Delay
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

In hydraulic systems is possible to have a delay time of high speed introduction. This delay time is programmable in tenth

w
w

p
w

n
of seconds at the address 25 (TST). It is necessary programming a value between ‘70’ and ‘99’ and the delay value is

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

obtained subtracting to that value ‘70’ (delay = TST – 70) tenth of seconds).

p
w
w

E.g. program TST = 83 for a 13 tenth of seconds ‘ delay (83 – 70 = 13 tenth of seconds).

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

Program ‘70’ at address 10 to avoid TG delay.

w
w

p
w

n
5.41 TM

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
Input signal of thermistor that measures temperature engine. Ref. paragraph 7.6
n

-li
w
.u

5.42 TO
t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Input for the thermoresistance that measures the oil temperature.

t.c

w
w
w

This contros is active don’t programming the value“+2” at address 62.

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

If analogic value in input is higher than wanted limit (resistance thermometry > 4K Ω), with ‘70’ fault. Unlocking
t.c
-li

p
w

is possible only if TO input measures a resistance thermometry < 1,5K Ω

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

NOTE: The fault is gerenated only at floor.

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

5.43 TP
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

Output for the Slow speed signal (TP relay).

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

The TP output has many actions depending on the value programmed at address 25 (TST) and on the system type.
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

TST = from 0 to 69 TST = from 70 to 99

.c

p-

w
w

Traction/Rope system TP = slow speed output signal TP always ON

w

ft

w
.u

TP always ON and TG delayed of (TST – 70) tenth of seconds

.c
li
w

Hydraulic system TP = star / delta starting

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

5.43.1 TP Delay
ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
In Rope Systems it is possibile to delay the deactivation of the TP relay compared to the activation of TS and TD relays.
p-

ft
w
ift

This delay time (tenths of a second) is programmable at address 25 (TST). It is necessary programming a value between
li
w
.u

.c

p-

‘70’ and ‘99’ and the delay value is obtained subtracting to that value ‘70’ (delay = (TST – 70) tenth of seconds). E.g.
w
w

ft

program TST = 83 for a 13 tenth of seconds ‘ delay (83 – 70 = 13 tenth of seconds).

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

This feature can be used to manage the soft stop on the inverter by connecting TP on contactors and TS and TD on the
p-

ft
w
ft

commands for the inverter. With this type of operation you can perform a soft stop outside the plan too (useful for soft
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

stop on electric platform lifts with ‘Man Present’ Mode or for soft stop in Inspection Mode.
w
p-

ft

Ref Paragraph 9.3.1

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

5.44 TSD
p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

It is the input for the check of up and down direction run’s contactors.
p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

 It has to be closed to GND when system is idle, otherwise fault ‘47’ is signalled.
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

 It has to be open when lift is moving. If this contact doesn’t open when control board activate TS or TD, are
w
p-

ft
w

generated fault ‘52’ for TS and fault ‘51’ for TD, call is cancelled and system keeps reserved. That happens also if
n

li
w
.u

.c

TSD closes when the car is running.

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

30
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
5.45 VIM

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
This output supplies a 13,5Vdc voltage backed up with battery that can be used to power other external boards which

t
lif
n

w
have to be powered from battery in absence of main power supply (max 1A) .

.u

.c

p-

w
5.46 LED SIGNALLING

w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
All the most important inputs have a led that indicates if the corresponding I/O is active (LED light ON) or inactive (LED

ft
w

-li
light OFF).

w
.u

.c

w
There are also four LEDS that signal some particular states of the control board:

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
 Led ‘PWR’. w
.c

ft
w
 Led ‘Fault’

p
ft

-li
w
.u
 Led ‘Err’

.c
-li

p
w
 Led ‘Ready’

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
5.46.1
-li

Led PWR
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
It is a GREEN LED that signals the presence of power supply on the control board. It lights up when the control board

-li
w
.u

t.c

receives the power supply voltage.

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
5.46.2 Led Fault

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

It is a RED LED that signals the presence of a fault condition that blocks the system. It remains on until there is a fault
t.c

w
w

p
condition.
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

5.46.3 Led Err

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

It is a YELLOW LED that indicates if there are faults memorized in the fault record. In normal conditions the led is off
w

p
w

n
and it lights up when there are faults in memory. The yellow LED flashing indicates the presence of a fault stored in the
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
memory that has not been read yet.

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

5.46.4 Led Ready

w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
It is a GREEN LED that indicates the state of the control board’s microprocessor. It lights up when the microprocessor

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

has finished the start-up phase and is ready. The start-up phase is four seconds long but this time can be extended to ten
p

f
n

-li
w
f

seconds adding the value ‘+64’ at address 62.

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

31
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
6.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
ARCHITECT SYSTEM’S

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
SPECIFICATION

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
6.1DOOR PRE-OPENING

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
It possible in hydraulic systems only. It is necessary to enable APA input signal control (programming ‘+8’ at add. 62).

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
In order to enable door pre-opening, it is necessary to program parameter TRA (add.19) with value >= ’70’ and

.u

.c
-li

w
parameter 62 with value ‘+16’.

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
This input (APA), if closed in the re-levelling zone will enable the doors opening.
w
.u

.c

w
The safety circuit by-passes the door’s contacts to allow the car moving up to the landing stop.

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
6.2STARTING Y/

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
To enable this function, in hydraulic plant, it is necessary to program a value > ‘1’ and < ‘69’ at address 25 (TST).

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Ùin the figure below shows a possible contactor’s connection scheme for Y/ starting:
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
Safety Chain
w

f
n

.u
+48V

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
CT
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Control Board
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
TG TP TD TS

w
TSD APG CPP
w

KY

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

KY

n
K
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

KS KD KG
t.c

K KG KD

w
w

f
n

K

-li
w
f

.u

KG KY KD KS
t.c
-li

KY KS RAP
w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

RCP
t.c

V VL VD

t.
K

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

During the climbing starting, these following steps occur:

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

TP signal’s activation for STAR power supply → it enables K y activaction (the contactor for STAR power
w

1.
n

li
w
.u

supply).
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

2. TS signal’s activation → it enables K S activaction (the up direction contactor) for engine power supply (STAR w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
STARTING).
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w

TP signal’s disactivation after TST time and consequent activation of K∆ (contactor for DELTA power supply).
.u

3.
.c

p-
w
w

ft

NOTE: when car runs in down direction, TP keeps active and is used as an auxiliar contact for down direction.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Futhermore, programming this timer (TST) to an odd value, it is enabled CPP control before TS activation.
p-

ft
w
ft

Remember: it used a starting valve to disconnect the load at the starting.

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

6.3BATTERY
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

Battery supplies power to the lift control board, serial expansion boards and safety circuit to enable alarm and emergency
p-

ft
w
w

ft

manoeuvres. When electric network is on, the elevator control board charges the battery with its internal battery charge.
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

At address 28 (SBA time) you can decide how long the battery must back up the main power supply when this one goes
w
p-

ft

down. SBA time may be set to a value between ‘0’ and ‘98’ minutes. Programming at addr.28 the value ‘99’ the battery
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

will back up the power supply for an indeterminate time (until battery discharge).
p-

w
w
w

If battery is connected to BAT connector, EM must be kept close during power outage in order to avoid fault ’81’ code
ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

message for overrun.

w
p-

ft
w

If control board turns off, it is not possible turn on again the board through the battery because the battery is excluded for
n

li
w
.u

the first 4 seconds (during start-up phase) after the power supply’s switching on.
.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

32
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
6.4SERIAL OR PARALLEL WIRING

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
The communication from control panel (control board) to car and with each floor can be carried out through:

t
lif
n

w
.u


.c
parallel wiring

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
Wires are connected to each control board connectors (connectors 0-23); so is used 1 wire for each signal. Ref.

w
.u

.c
-li
w
paragraph 2.5

w
w

ft
w

n
 serial wiring ( programming ‘64’ at add. 11)

-li
w
.u

.c

w
Inputs and outputs are sent to the control board and turn into serial inputs and outputs thanks to car serial expansion

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
boards (SERCAR_LCD...) or landing serial expansion boards (VEG0600, VEG0700, FLOORDIS_01..). Ref.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
chapter 10.
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
NOTE: mixed wiring is possible (e.g. a serial display can be connected to a parallel system)

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

6.5LANDING AND SLOWING DOWN ZONE ’S MAGNETIC

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

SENSORS LAYOUT

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

The control board is able to manage three different magnetic sensors layout:

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u
 DA\DB layout;

t.c
-li
w

p
 DA\DB reverse sensor layout;

w
w

f
n

.u
-li
 IF\ICV layout. w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

The second configuration (DA\DB reverse sensor layout) should be used only when it is not possible to carry out system

w
w
w

f
n

with DA\DB slowing down magnetic sensor layout. The choice through these system type (DA\DB normal, DA\DB

-li
w
.u

t.c

reverse or IF\ICV sensor layout) is done programming address 7, 14 and 15:

w

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

ADDRESS VALUE FUNCTION

w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
0 DA\DB normal magnetic sensors layout

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

7 64 DA\DB reverse magnetic sensors layout

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

0 DA\DB magnetic sensors layout

w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
14 32 ICV\IF magnetic sensors layout
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
0 IF\DB e ICV/DA open at floor
n

-li
w
f

.u

15
.c
-li
w

w
64 IF\DB e ICV/DA closed at floor

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

33
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w

Layout
(A) ICV\IF
n w
-li
f .u .c w
w
p- t.c w p n w
.u w

RD IF ICV RS
li
RD IF ICV RS

w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
-li .u .c w w ft w
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
w p n
Optional

p-

layout
.c w .u t.c
n w li ft w p n w -li
.u .c w w ft w
w n w
-li
f .u .c w

(B) Normal DA\DB

n

RD IF ICV RS
p
RD IF ICV RS

w
p-
.u t.c w w
w

Optional
li

34
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p- w lif
Optional

li .u .c w

layout
n -li .u t.c
.u
ft
.c w p- w f w n
n w li .u t.c w
p-
p- w ft w p n w lif

RD IF ICV RS
t
RD IF ICV RS

li .u .c w

(C) Reversed DA\DB

ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
w p n

Optional
.c p-
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n -li w
Zone

w w f n
LLING

w
p-
.u t.c w p
w li ft w p n w -li
.u .c w w ft w
n w
-li
f .u .c w
w p n
Zone

p-
li .u t.c w w
ft w p n w
-li .u
RELEVE SLOWING DOWN

.c w .u
ft
.c w p-
n w
-li
f w p n w
. t. w lif
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
6.6 ENLARGED SLOWING DOWN ZONE AND NON-REGULAR

p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
FLOOR DISTANCES

w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
The control board is also able to manage particular magnets layout as non-regular interfloor distance and enlarged

ft
w

n
slowing down zone.

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

Normal slowdown: d>2Xn

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

Long slowdown: d<2XL

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
Non regular landings slowdown d<XB:
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

(A) ICV\IF (B) Normal DA\DB

w
w

p
w

n
Layout layout

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
Xn
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

XB
p

f
n

XL

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

d
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

XL XB
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

Xn w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

IF ICV IF ICV
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

Legend
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

d= distance of gap
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w

Xn= Normal slowing down zone;

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

XL= Long slowing down zone.

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

XB= Non regular landing slowing down zone

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w


ft

Fast System with enlarged slowdown at all floors: these plants need a slowing down zone larger then an half
n

.u

.c
li
w

normal distance between two consecutive floors, so-called ‘enlarged slowing down zone’. To guarantee an
p-

ft
w

35
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
enlarged slowing down zone it is sufficient to enable the appropriate function programming at address ‘2’ the value

w
lif

.u
‘32’ or ‘48’. Enabling this function and programming the CHF time (address 29) with value ‘97’, the RCPV time

.c

w
p-

t
(address 23) becomes the slowdown delay from average speed V1P.

lif
n

w
.u

.c
 Long slowdown: the slowdown space is defined ‘Long’ when it is larger then an half normal distance between two

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
consecutive floor, that is when slowdown begins leaving the slowing down magnetic sensor of the previous floor. If

w
.u

.c
-li
w
this particular management involved only few landings, at most 3 floors, these landings must be set at addresses

w
w

ft
w

n
35(PB1), 40 (PB2) and 42 (PB3), inserting a value equal to the sum of the lower landing of the pair and 50, without

-li
w
.u

.c
programming the ‘enlarged slowing down zone’ function (insert at address 2 value ‘+0’ or ‘16’).

p
w

ft

n
The dual situation is also possible. If you need an enlarged slowing down zone for all floors (ind.2 value '32 'or '48')
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

you can program up to a maximum of 3 floors with normal slowing down zone to the addresses 35 (PB1), 40 (PB2 )

ft
w

p
ft

n
and 42 (PB3) inserting a value equal to the sum of the lower landing of the pair and 50.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

(A) ICV\IF (B) Normal DA\DB

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Layout layout

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

RD IF ICV RS RD IF ICV RS
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
UPPER FLOOR

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
Slowing down
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

direction zone
w

p
w

at floor 2

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Slowing up
t.c

w
w
w

direction at

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

upper floor
t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

FLOOR 2

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
Slowing down
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
direction zone at

w
w

p
w

f
n

floor 1

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w

Slowing up
.u

.c

p-

w
direction at
w
w

ft

floor 2 w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

RELEVE
w

LLING
li
w

FLOOR 1
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

Zone
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

Slowing down
li
w
.u

.c

p-

direction zone
w
w

ft

at first floor
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Slowing up
p-

ft
w

direction at
ft

li
w
.u

.c

floor 1
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

NOTE*
w

ft

RELEVE
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

FIRST FLOOR
p-

LLING
w
p-

ft

Zone
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

NOTE* :Must be active the

w

ft

w
.u

control on APA ( hydraulic

.c
li
w

RD IF ICV RS RD IF ICV RS
w

plant only)
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

36
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w

7
.u t.c

15
14
w li ft w p n w -li
w ft w

ADDRESS
.c

Programming:
.u n w -li .u .c w

IF
w
p- w f w p n w
IF
li .u t.c w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.c

ICV s
.u w

ICVd
.u t.c p-
n w li
w p n w

0
0
p- ft ICV
w lif

64
32
li .u .c w t.c

VALUE
n .u
Control board

-li
ft w w f TD n
TS
.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li ft w p n w -li
-li .u .c w w ft w
IF e ICV close at landing

ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u w

37
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f n w

RD IF ICVd ICVs RS
w
p-
.u t.c w p w
w

IF\DB e ICV/DA open at floor

li

ICV\IF magnetic sensors layout

w n -li .u

IF\DB e ICV/DA closed at floor

.u
ft
.c w p- w ft w
w
Fast system magnetic sensors layout (2 ICV sensors)

.u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w

DA\DB normal magnetic sensors layout

p-
.u .c w w lif

FUCTION
li n -li .u t.c
ft w w f
IF

FLOOR 1
.u .c w
p- t.c w p-
IF

n w li .u n w

floor 1
p- ft w p w lif

FIRST FLOOR
t
UPPER FLOOR
TS

li .u .c w
ICV s

.c
at floor 1

ft w n -li .u

Slowing up
direction at
w f n

at first floor
upper floor w p
Slowing up
direction at
.c p-
n w .u t.c w

Slowing down
ICV

direction zone
li
Slowing down
direction zone

w n
Control board

-li
ft w p w
TD

.c ft w
ICVd

.u n w -li .u .c w
w p- w f w p n
w li .u t.c w
IF e ICV open at landing

w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
p-
li .u t.c w w
ft w p n w
-li .u
.c w .u
ft
.c w p-
n w
-li
f w p n w
. t. w lif
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
 Non-regular landings (pair of ‘next-landings’): it is defined as a floor whose distance from the upper floor is

w
p-

t
lif
n
smaller than a regular slowing down zone. This landings must be setup at addresses 35, 40, and 42.

w
.u

.c

p-
The car will start to slow down entering in the slowing down magnetic sensor of the previous floor of the couple

w
w
w

ft

n
with a delay time programmable at address 23 (RCPV time) with a value from 0 to 99 tenth of seconds. When car

w
.u

.c
-li
w
runs through between the ‘next-landing’, magnetic sensor must properly be placed in order to use enlarged slowing

w
w

ft
w

n
down zone operation to obtain an accurate levelling, without resort to a slow speed run.

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
(A) ICV\IF (B) Normal DA\DB

.u

.c
-li

w
Layout layout

p
w

ft

n
p

4-Slowing down direction

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

zone at floor 1 (starting from

.c

ft
w

p
a floor more than 2)
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
4-Slowing down direction

p
w
w

f
n

zone at floor 1 (starting from

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

a floor more than 2)

w
w

p
w

n
FLOOR 2

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
3-Slowing up direction
w

f
n

at upper floor 1 (starting

-li
w
.u

t.c

from floor 2)
w
A*

p
w

n
f
n

.u
dx

t.c
-li
w

2-Slowing up direction
t.c

w
B*

w
w

at upper floor 2 (starting

p

f
n

-li
w
f

from floor 1)
.u

Ind.35=1
t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

(first floor)
f
n

.u

t.c
FLOOR 1
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

1-Slowing down direction

n

.u
li
w
.u

zone at floor 2 (starting from

.c

p-

w
w

a floor less than 2)

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w


n

Very next landings: when the interfloor distance between the two next-landings is not sufficient to place the
li
w
.u

.c

.
slowing down magnets, the next-landings’ zone is covered at slow speed (programming ‘+8’ at address 63 and
p-

w
w
w

ft

lower floor programming). w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

As shown in Figure 1, slowing down magnets can be placed or not, that depends on interfloor distance.
ift

li
w
.u

Using DA/DB magnets layout, the extreme floor sensor (RS or RD) zone do not superimpose the slowing down sensor
.c

p-
w

(IF or ICV) zone; for this reason slowing down sensor at the extreme landing is shorter than the other ones.
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Figure 2 shows the situations in which, slowing down zone or interfloor distance need the partial or complete
p-

ft
w
ft

superimposition of the two sensors zones, causing malfunctionings.

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

38
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 When ‘next-landing’ the extreme floor phasing sensor zone must not cover 2 floors (ref. figures 2.B and 2.D), so

w
lif

.u
during synchronising phase it is necessary insert a second extreme floor phasing sensor for slowing down (RS2

.c

w
p-

t
and/or RD2, auxiliary extreme floor phasing sensors for car pre-slowing down), wired in this way.

lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
RD2 RS2

n
C B

-li
w
RD

.u
O O

.c
G
RD TG

w
N A

p
w

ft

n
RS T R
n

TD TS

.u

.c
R D

-li
w RS
.c

ft
w

p
L
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
The use of auxiliary extreme landing sensors is an alternative solution when there is an ‘enlarged slowing down’ zone,

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

instead of APA’s use.

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
IF ICV RS RS2
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
UPPER

p
w

w
f

FLOOR

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
(B) Pair of ‘next-landing’ at the upper floor
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li

LOWER
w
.u

.c

p-

w
FLOOR
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

RD2 RD IF ICV
w
p-

ft
w

Pair of ‘next-landing’ at the lower floor

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

Magnets layout at the extreme landings in case of ‘ ‘next-landing’

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Examples: programming examples to obtain different combination of normal floor, enlarged slowing down and non-
p-

ft
w
ft

regular landings.
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Non-Regular
.u

.c

p-

Normal Slowing Enlarged Slowing

w

ft
w

Landings
w

ft

Down Landings Down Landings

li
w
.u

‘Next-Landings’
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

All No one No one Add.2 Addr.35 Addr.40 Addr.42

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

0 or 16 99 99 99
p-

All No one 1/2 e 7/8

w
w
w

ft

0 or 16 1 7 99
w

All, excepted 3/4 3/4 1/2 e 7/8

.u

.c
li
w

0 or 16 1 7 53
p-

No one All No one

w

ft
w

32 or 48 99 99 99
li
w

No one All 1/2 e 7/8

.u

.c

p-

32 or 48 1 7 99
w

3/4 All, excepted 3/4 1/2 e 7/8

w

ft

32 or 48 1 7 53
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

39
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
6.7DELAYED STOPPING

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
It is possible to delay the car stop of a programmable time (TRIF). This delay time can be programmed at add. 26 up to

t
lif
n

w
9.9 seconds in units of 1 tenth of second. Stop delaying allows to decrease the re-levelling numbers.

.u

.c

p-

w
If the programmed time is too long or stop magnet is too short, the car surpasses the stop zone, fault code ‘42’ is signalled

w
w

ft

w
and in any case the car will stops crossing IF. Inspection service mode do not manage the fault ‘42’ control.

.u

.c
-li
w

w
w
TRIF delay is always active.

ft
w

n
In rope plant, setting parameter 31 (L13) at ‘99’, motor contactors deactivation is delayed of TRIF time after CS1 input

-li
w
.u

.c

w
deactivation that controls break opening. The RU output can be used for inverter moving enabling to allow controlled

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
stop.

.c
-li
w
.c

6.8PHOTOCELLS AND SAFETY REOPENING SYSTEM

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
CM1, CM2 and INT (CM3) are the inputs for the photocells and safety reopening system signals for 1° entance, 2°

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
entrance and 3° entrance ( respectively AP, AP2 and SCP).

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

To make work CM2 and INT (CM3) as safety reopening input signals for 2° and 3° entrance, it is necessary to enable the

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
second and the third access programming the opportune values at address ‘0’and ‘3’.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
If one of this inputs is opened:

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
 Disable the closing of the door for the respective access and command a reopening (if door were closing). Ref.
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

paragraph 6.12

w
f

.u
 Cancel the call.

t.c
-li
w

p
w
 Extend the opening door time.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
When the doors are closed (at input CS there is the 48V signal) this inputs are disabled.
w

p
w

w
At all floor are enabled only the inputs respective to the open entrances.
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
This inputs can be used to control the closing contacts of the external manual doors.

w
w

f
6.9GONG
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
At the add. ‘8’ and ‘9’ it is possible to program this functions:
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

 1 gong during speed change or at stopping;

t.c

w
w
w

 1 or 2 impulses in down direction run (in up direction there always may be only 1 gong):

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

Address 8 Address 9 GONG

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

‘+0’ or ‘1’ ‘+0’ or ‘4’ Gong during speed change, 1 Gong in up direction and 1 in down direction run
t.c

w
w

‘+2’ or ‘3’ ‘+0’ or ‘4’

p

Gong during speed change, 1 Gong in up direction e 2 in down direction run

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

‘+0’ or ‘1’ ‘+8’ or ‘12’

t.c
-li

Gong during car stopping, 1 Gong in up direction e 1 in down direction run

w

p
w

‘+2’ or ‘3’ ‘+8’ or ‘12’ Gong during car stopping, 1 Gong in up direction e 2 in down direction run
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
The gong impulse time is programmable at address ‘20’ (TIG time) within range 245 tenths of seconds.
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

To disable the GONG signal you must set the TIG time to 0.
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

The Gong is also disabled during programming procedure (PRESET = ON), during inspection operation and when the
w

.u
li
w

system is blocked.
.u

.c

p-

w
w

If 2 gongs are used, the time interval between the two impulses is of 1 second (not programmable).
w

ft

w
6.10 LAW ‘13’ OPERATION
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

The Law ‘13’ is the legislation that regulates the management of the alarm. It provides for a defined sequence of events:
li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

 Press the ALARM button (connected on inputs AL+ and AL-) for a fixed time of 0.5 s to activate intermittently the
ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

alarm’s signalling on output SA. The alarm’s signalling stays on even after you release the button.
.c

w
p-

ft
w

 Pressing ALARM RECEIVED button (connected on input AR) turns off the alarm signal SA and activates the alarm
ift

li
w
.u

.c

received signal with a steady light (connected on output SAR).

p-
w
w

 Pressing the ALARM RESET button (connected on RES) or activating a manual call (in car or external), both signals
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

SA and SAR are switched off.

.c

p-

ft
w

6.11 IMMEDIATE STARTING

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

Pressing the doors closing push button (PCP) or any car call push button, TAP (waiting time with open door) is cancelled.
n

.u

.c
li
w

So, the doors close and car starts immediately.

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

6.12 RETIRING CAM

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

PAT output is used for the retiring cam. With manual doors is available even CP output for this function programming ‘0’
w

ft
n

.u

or ‘32’ at add. 2 or activating OPERATOR ON during run function (add. 12, value ‘2’ or ‘3’). It is activated at the start
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

of service (also in inspection mode), even if door are still opened, and it is disabled going to stop.
w

ft

6.13 DOORS
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

Door opening and closing are regulated by programmable times:

.u

.c

p-
w
w


ft

TAP add. 16: it is the time the door remains open with car reserved signal active. This timer is cancelled when the
n

.u

.c
li
w

PCP button is pushed or when a car calling button is pushed. If car is at landing, there are not reservations and the
p-

ft
w

40
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
system is programmed to do the parking with close doors (add. 1 value ‘8’ or ‘12’), TAP is the time the plant wait

w
lif

.u
before closing the doors and start to serve another booking (in collective operation).

.c

w
p-

t
When car is at landing and there are already others reservations, it is the time after which doors close and the car

lif
n

w
starts again.

.u

.c

p-

w
w
 TOP add. 17: maximum time for door opening command

ft

w
.u


.c
TCH add. 18: maximum time for door closing command. The closing relay remains ON until the complete closure,

-li
w

w
w

ft
which is marked by the presence manoeuvre voltage on input CS, that works as limit switch. The maximum time of
w

-li
w
closing TCH must be greater than or equal to the time actually used to close the door. If the door’s check is enabled

.u

.c

w
(programming the value ‘16’ or ‘48’ at address 10), the activation of CPP input is used as confirmation of the door

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
closing in addition to the presence of manoeuvre voltage on input CS ( this means that the closing relay stay ON

-li
w
.c

ft
until CPP input is activated even if the manoeuvre voltage is present on input CS ).
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
The door closing command can persist for all the car run if it is enabled the OPERATOR ON function

.c
-li

w
programming the value ‘2’ or ‘3’ at address 12.

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
 TRA add. 19: door opening delay after stop at floor if TRA<’70’, otherwise (TRA>=70, delay=TRA-70) it is the

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
delay on door opening (pre-opening) after the activation of APA input. APA input check must be enabled

p
w

ft

-li
w
programming the value ‘+8’ at address 62.

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
6.13.1 Door Checking

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

To enable this checks it is necessary to program at address 10 the value ‘16’ or ‘48’ and it is necessary to connect the

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

door relays control contact in series with the relative inputs APG and CPP (do not connect this inputs if this control is not

p
w
w

active). If the control is not enabled connect at least a normally close contact of opening relay RAP at APG input or at

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

CM input.

w
w

p
w

n
The fault relative to door control are:

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
 Fault ‘50’ and ‘61’: if the doors don’t close, connector CS remain open for all the closing time TCH or RCP (closing

w
w

f
n

-li
w
external relay) is disabled (CPP remains closed) after delay time (RITUSC) on outputs and delay time (RITING) on
.u

t.c

w
inputs, board returns one of the following errors:

p
w

n
f

 fault ‘50’: If CPP input is closed means that the external closing relay RCP is faulty or doors are closed with
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
safety contact that is out of order;
w

f
n

 fault ‘61’:If CPP opens means that RCP and door safety contacts are OK while door operator is faulty;

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
In any case the board opens the doors and tries to close them again for a number of attempts that depend on the

p
w

n
up

value programmed at address 60 (NUMCH). If the problem persist the board return fault ‘0-31’ (missed start). With
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
the reopening devices activation (CM, PAP, etc...), the number of doors closing attempts made is carried to zero
w

f
n

-li
w
to avoid the missed start fault due to the continuos activation of these opening devices.
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

 Fault ‘48’ and ‘49’: if the doors don’t open, connector CS remains live for all the opening time TOP, or RAP
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

(external opening relay) is disabled (APG remains closed) after delay on RITUSC outputs and antirebounce time on
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
RITING inputs, the board cancels all the booked calls and returns one of the following errors:
n

-li
w
f

.u

 fault ‘49’: If APG input remains closed (means that the external opening relay RAP is faulty or doors are
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

opened with the safety contact out of order).

p

.u
li
w

 fault ‘48’: If APG is opened means that RAP is OK while door operator is faulty, so the board returns fault
.u

.c

p-

w
w

‘48’.
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

NOTE: If the door’s check is not enabled (programming at address 10 value ‘0’ or ‘32’), faults ‘61’ and ‘48’ remains
w
p-

ft
w

active. Also, with the door’s check disabled, the opening command is maintained for at least 5 seconds after the
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
deactivation of CS input.
w
w

ft

The doors control is automatically disabled during inspection mode and emergency mode. w
n

.u

.c
li
w

ATTENTION: The door’s check is used to enable or disable the reporting of door failures. The procedures for reopening
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

and reclosing attempts in case of malfunctions in the door management remain unchanged regardless of the fact that the
li
w
.u

.c

p-

door’s check is enabled or disabled.

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

6.13.2 Door Opening Exclusion During Testing Operation

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

To enable this function is necessary to set the parameter at address 30, with an odd value.
.c
li

p-
w
p-

To enable the ‘door opening exclusion during testing operation’ it is necessary to keep pressed PCP push button (keep
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

active the PCP input). Doors will be closed even if interlock will be opened.
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

6.13.3 Manual Doors

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

To select the ‘manual doors’ option program value ‘0’ or ‘32’ at address 2.
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

In that case:
p-

w
w
w

ft

 CP output drives the retiring cam;

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

 AP output drives the GONG signal;

w

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

Two operation modes are possible depending on the value programmed at address 1.
p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

41
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 Value ‘0’ or ‘4’ (Parking with open doors): the board accepts the call with input CS open too. The control board will

w
lif

.u
wait the door safety interlock signals before to generate (after TMP time) a ‘missed start’ fault.

.c

w
p-
 Value ‘8’ or ‘12’ (Parking with closed doors): if CS input remains open all the calls are cancelled and the plants

t
lif
n

w
remains reserved.

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
External door’s

.u
Car

.c
-li
w Stop Blocks

w
closing contacts door

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c
Block are closed by Retiring cams

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ALT CT

w
CS

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
After the last served call, the ‘Reserved’ car signalling’s lights stay on for the TOC time.
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

The door faults and the closing and opening time are ignored.

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

6.13.4 Automatic Doors

p
w

ft
p

.u
To select the ‘automatic doors’ option program ‘16’ or ‘48’ at address 2.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
In that case:

p
w

w
 CP output drives the closing of the doors;
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
 AP output drives the opening of the doors of the first access;

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
6.13.5 Semi-Automatic Doors
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

With semi-automatic doors (that means automatic car doors and manual landing doors) you have to select the same option

w
w
w

as ‘automatic doors’: program ‘16’ or ‘48’ at address 2.

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

Landing doors safety contacts must be placed before the ALT terminal.
w

p
w

n
For hydraulic plant, to allow RE-LEVELLING even with landing doors open, it is necessary not disturb ALT input with
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

approach contacts and it is necessary also to connect a relay to the approach end and stop the photocell (with a normally
t.c

w
w
w

open contact) or closing the PAP input to avoid car automatic doors closing with the manual landing doors opened.

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
6.13.6 Multi-Entrances
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

We speak about Multi-Entrances when there is more than an access to the car ( Accesses on different car sides).

w
w

f
n

-li
w
In this case car has 2 or 3 distinct entrances. Entrances are selective when operations of the 2 or 3 entrances at the same
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
landing are independents. Each selective door is considered like a separated stop, then, system has a stops number bigger

p
w
p

f
n

.u
than the landings one.
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
For each landing, it is possible to program at most 3 entrances. Each entrance is driven through the AP, AP2 e SCP

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
signals and controlled by CM1, CM2 e INT(CM3) photosensors. They are programmed at addresses from 50 up to 59. w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
Floor No.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
1 → AP (1° entrance)
w
w

ft

2 → AP2 (2° entrance) w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

4 → SCP (3° entrance)

w

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

 the third entrance on output SCP must be enabled programming ‘64’ at address 3.
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

 For tunnel-opening between the 2 entrances at one landing, program ‘+4’ at the relative floor. For this function the
ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

third access must not be present.

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

All entrances are closed by CP signal.

.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

For Example
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

Side 2 Side 1 Address Programmed value

.c
li
w

p-
w

Floor 7 add. 57 7 (C8) 57 1

p-

ft

(C7) 6 Floor 6 add. 56 6 (C7) Tunnel-opening 56 4

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

(C6) 5 Floor 5 add. 55 55 2

p-

w
w

(C5) 4B Floor 4 add. 54 4A (C4) Independent openings 54 3

w

ft

w
.u

Floor 3 add. 53 3 (C3) 53 1

.c
li
w

(C2) 2 Floor 2 add. 52 52 2

p-

ft
w

Floor 1 add. 51 1 (C1) 51 1

n

li
w
.u

.c

Floor 0 add. 50 0 (C0) 50 1

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

42
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
The bold numbers represent the car call push-buttons for each floor and for each opening-side. The numbers in brackets

w
lif

.u
(red numbers) represent the corresponding signals that must be connected to the control board or to the serial expansion

.c

w
p-

t
board. Ref paragraph 2.5 and chapter 10.

lif
n

w
At floor 4 there are two independent call push-buttons (selective opening).

.u

.c

p-

w
w
At floor 6 we have the tunnel-opening and the two push-buttons corresponding to the two opening side are wired to the

ft

w
.u

.c
same board terminal because they are managed as a single call push-button.

-li
w

w
w

ft
At address 32 (NP parameter) must be programmed the number of floors (8) because the number of stops are
w

-li
w
automatically calculated.

.u

.c

p
NOTE:For plant with number of floor more than 10, the board active always the AP output (from 11

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
floor onwards) w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
6.13.7 OPERATOR ON During Run

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

This function can be useful to manage electronic doors operators that have not limit switches signals. To enable this
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

function program ‘2’ or ‘3’ at the add. 12. Opening and closing commands are active until the system is reserved and the

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
control of maximum opening (TOP) and closing (TCH) times is excluded. The doors open and close commands remains

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

active for a maximum time that is the missed start time TMP (add.21). If the commands reach this time the fault 67 is

p
w

ft
p

signalled. Ref paragraph 7.2.

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

6.14 LIMIT SWITCH TEST

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

This test can be made through board terminals (RS, RD, IF, ICV). It is necessary to provide bridges to the synchronising

p
w
w

f
sensors and magnetic sensors of the extreme landing to create a floors count error.
n

.u
-li
w
.u

6.15 PARKING
t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

6.15.1 Parking Operation

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

 Parking operation at landing NST: after a programmable TSN time at add. 27 from ‘0’ to ‘99’ x 10 seconds from
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
reserved signal deactivation, car is moved to parking flor (NST) programmed at address 34. this operation is disabled

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
if NST > stops number.

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u


t.c
-li

Parking operation at lower floor after 14 minutes: only for hydraulic lift there is an automatic operation that
w

p
w

moves car to the lower floor after 14 minutes from reserved signal deactivation, programming ‘0’ or ‘2’ at add. 12.

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

When the car is at ground floor (‘0’ floor) cannot be move to other destinations for parking.
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
During Firefighters service, Fire service and internal mode any automatic parking operation is disabled. If parking
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
operation is with close doors (SPC, Ref. paragraph 6.14.2), after this operation doors do not open and there is not

p
w
p

f
n

.u
GONG.
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
6.15.2 Parking With Open or Close Doors w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

After last service, car can stand with open door (SPA) programming ‘0’ or ‘4’ at add. 1, or with close door (SPC)
ft
w

.u
li
w

programming ‘8’ or ‘12’ at add. 1. If SPC is enabled, at the end of parking operation, the doors do not open and there is
.u

.c

p-

w
w

not GONG.
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

If the system is programmend SPC (Parking with close door), it is possible to program up to 2 stops with parking with
w
p-

ft
w

open door (SPA): one at address. 36 (SPA1) and the other at address 37 (SPA2). Dually If the system is programmend
n

li
w
.u

SPA (Parking with open door), it is possible to program up to 2 stops with parking with close door (SPC): one at address.
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

36 (SPA1) and the other at address 37 (SPA2).

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

With the open doors parking active, doing a call at the same floor activates the GONG signal.
.c

w
p-

ft

To exclude the 2 stops with ‘inverted’ parking mode, program a value greater than ‘31’at add. 36 and 37.
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

6.16 TIMERS
.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w

Lift control board has two general purpose timers:

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

 CS1 input/ RU output

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

This delay may be set to a value from ‘0’ to ‘96’ tenths of second at address 31 (L13). It is disabled when ‘99’ value
.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

is programmed, and CS1/RU are used for the safety circuit or for inverter control.
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

 FS3 input/ CPF output (TMR3)

p-
w
p-

ft

This delay may be set to a value from ‘0’ to ‘95’ tenths of second at address 29 (CHF).
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

This two timers have different meanings:

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

43
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Inputs CS1/FS3

w
p-

t
T

lif
n

w
.u

.c
Output RU

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
Output CPF

.c
-li
w T

w
w

ft
w

p
the first timer concerns the excitement instant, the second one the de-energize instant.

-li
w
.u

.c
6.17 PLANT TYPES: SINGLE AUTOMATIC PUSH BUTTON

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
(SINGLE CALL), COLLECTIVE OR DUPLEX PLANT
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
6.17.1 Single Automatic Push Button Plant (Single Call)
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

It accepts only one call at time. The control board works up to 12 stops without the use of serial expansion board.

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

6.17.2 Down Collective Plant

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
It is divided into 2 ways: w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
 Car calls

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

 Landing calls

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
It accepts all calls, but landing calls are accepted only during car down run and if load is not full.
.u

t.c

w
w

p
Up to 32 stops: up to 12 stops with DEC16, the board to decode the position, to reach 32 stops control board needs
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
serial expansion modules. Duplex plants are possible thanks to a connection between 2 control boards;
-li
w

w
w
Multiplex systems are possible up to 4 lifts thanks to a multiplex central board
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
6.17.3 Up / Down Collective
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

It is divided into 3 ways:

w
w
w

f
n

-li
 w
f

.u

Car calls
t.c
-li

w


p
Up Landing calls
w

n
up

f
n

.u


t.c
Down landing calls
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

It accepts all calls, but landing calls priority depending on run direction and if load is not full.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Up to 32 stops: up to 8 stops with DEC16 board to decode the position, to reach 32 stops control board needs serial
w

p
w
p

expansion modules.
f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

Duplex plants are possible thanks to a connection between 2 control boards;

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

Multiplex plants are possible up to 4 lifts thanks to a multiplex central board.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

NOTE: Programming at the add. 14, the value ‘16’ or ‘48’ it is possible activate a simplified management of collective
p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

plant. When the arrival at landing happens, all reservation are cancelled; in case of overload activation, all landing
p-

w
w
w

ft

reservation are cancelled w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

6.17.4 Duplex Plant

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

It is possible manage duplex plant using two lift control boards.

w

ft

In order to manage duplex plant it is necessary setup both control boards and program duplex service mode (‘+4’ at w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

parameter MISC (add. 63).

ft
w
ift

It is necessary also setup one of 2 boards like ‘master’, programming ‘+16’ at parameter 63 of chosen board.
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

Each lboard controls only one car so:

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

 car signals are wired directly to the control board

ft

li
w
.u

 landing signals are parallel wired to both control boards

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

All informations will be exchanged between the 2 expansion boards through RS232 imput (9 wires with a serial cross
.c

p-

ft
w
w

cable.
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

The call assignment is dynamic and it is calculated at all times.

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

Functioning is synthetically resumed with these cases:

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

 if both cars are stopped: the landing call is served by the nearest car
w
.u

.c
li
w

 if both cars are running: the external call will reach both the control boards but the call will be served from the one
w
p-

ft
w

that can do the work faster. (not necessary is the nearest car). For example, if the first car is nearer then the second
li
w
.u

.c

p-

one, but it has some car calls at the intermediate landings (between car position and destination floor), the second one
w
w

ft

will reach this floor for serving the call;

n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

44
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 if both cars halt at the same level: the car with ‘master’ control board will reach the destination floor.

w
lif

.u

.c
If serial expansion board are used to collect landing calls you will need 2 board for each call. Each serial expansion board

w
p-

t
lif
n
will be connected with only one control board whereas each landing signals will be connected both to the 2 expansion

w
.u

.c

p-
boards in parallel connection.

w
w
w

ft

n
If a lift is in one of the following cases will send to the other lift its ‘out of order’ state, so the operating one will supply

w
.u

.c
-li
w
all the calls :

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c
 in inspection service mode

p
w

ft

n
 in programming mode
n

.u

.c
-li
 w
.c

in faulty state

ft
w

p

ft

n
during syncronizing operation

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

 during emergency operation

p
w

ft

n

p

in Fire service mode of firefighters service mode

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u


.c

in internal service mode

ft
w

p
w


ft

n
with CCC and CCS inputs active

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

 with ALT input active

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
6.17.5 Duplo

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Enabling the Duplex mode (ref paragraph 6.14.4) in a single automatic call system (address 13 value ‘0’ or ‘8’) you can

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
have the Duplo operation. w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
6.17.6 Multiplex Plant

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

Thank to a multiplex central board you can control up to 4 plants.

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

For more information look particular manual up.

w

p
w

6.18 INVERTER / ELECTRONIC UNIT MANAGEMENT

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
In the rope plant, setting parameter 31(L13) at ‘99’ contactors activation is delayed of TRIF time by CS1 input
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

deactivation (break opening control) whereas RU output can be used to enable inverter moving to allow controlled stop.
t.c
-li

p
Otherwise it can be used the SCP output (if there is not the third entrance, do not programming ‘0’ at add. 3): this output,
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

during standard working, is activated only to the arrival at the destination floor; during phasing mode and inspection
t.c

w
w

mode SCP is activated only to the arrival at extreme floors and remains activated at standing floor.
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

In the hydraulic plant, SCP output can be used even as ‘car at landing’ signal.
t.c
-li

p
6.19 SPEED
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

6.19.1 One Speed

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

If plant has only one run speed, program ‘4’ or ‘12’ at address 1
p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

6.19.2 Two Speeds w

.u

.c
li
w

w
If plant has two speeds (‘high’ and ‘slow’), program ‘0’ or ‘8’ at address 1
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

6.19.3 Three Speeds

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

Three speeds:
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

 Stopping speed (slow speed)

li
w
.u

.c

p-

 Velocity to cover distance between 2 floors (V1P or average speed)

w
w

ft

 Velocity to cover distance larger then 2 o more floors (V2P or high speed)
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

High speed is activated when the distance covered is larger then 2 floors and syncronizing/phasing or
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

inspection/maintenance service modes are not active.

p-
w
p-

ft

Programming the time CHF (address 29) with a value >= 97, the CPF output commands the high speed change (V2P).
n

.u

.c
li
w

To setup the slowing down zone for the maximum speed V2P, it is possible to enable the ‘enlarged slowing down zone’
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

function (programming the value ‘32’ or ’48’ at address 2) while, for average speed V1P, the slowdown can be delayed
w

ft

li
w
.u

with the RCPV Time (address 23). If the TST time (address 25) is not programmed with value ‘99’, this delay time
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

(RCPV) is active during synchronizing mode too, so the synchronizing sensor must be placed at a lower distance that the
n

.u
li
w
.u

one needed for the slowdown at maximum speed.

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

45
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
7.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
CONTROLS

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
7.1SAFETY CIRCUIT

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
To enable safety circuit control do not program ‘+4’ at add. 62 (in this way TMR1 is disabled for general use). When

-li
w
.u

.c

w
this control is enabled and when CS1 is opened re-levelling is automatically disabled.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
If there are the following situations:

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n


-li
w
Plant is not in INSPECTION SERVICE MODE

.u

.c
-li

w
ALT is not activated

p
w

ft

n
p


n

.u
Plant is not in OVERRUN

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
Plant is not in EMERGENCY SERVICE MODE
w

p
w

ft

n


-li
w
Plant is not in PHASING operation

.u

.c
-li
w

w
It is an hydraulic plant with DA/DB sensors configuration

p
w

ft
p


n

.u
Not call is activated

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

control is carried out on CS1 input according to the following picture:

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
IF
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
IS
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

ID

-li
w
.u

t.c

ON
w

p
RU
w

OFF

n
f
n

.u
open

t.c
-li
w
t.c

CS1

w
close

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

1,5s 4s 4s 1,5s
t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

At ARRIVAL
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

At START

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Only in IF zone, if after 1,5 seconds (add. 44 – RITUSC) CS1 remains open the plant will halt and it will be showed fault
w

p
w
p

‘83’.
f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
To activate the safety circuit can be used the output RU.

w
w

p
w

f
n

RU output is ON during re-levelling programming at address 31 the value ‘99’.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

Programming at address 31 the value ‘98’ RU output is activated in the door’s opening zone if it is enabled the check on
w

p
w

ft
w

APA input (value ‘+8’ at address 61) , otherwise is actifìvated when the stop zone is reached.
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

Halt ‘83’ is permanent, so it is possible to unlock the plant only pressing SPEEDY push button on DISP900 programming
p-

w
w
w

ft

keypad. This halt can be disabled programming ‘+4’ at add. 62. In this way CS1 input is disabled but RU remains w
.u

.c
li
w

activated.
w
p-

ft
w

The same fault happens if during re-levelling phase CS1 is open.

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
7.2RE-OPENING DEVICES
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

Re-opening device check signals if photocells, safety reopening systems (CM), doors open push button (PAP) remain
.c

w
p-

ft
w

active for more than the programmable time (seconds) at the address 21 TMP. If this happens the fault ‘67’ is generated.
ift

li
w
.u

.c

Regarding inputs CM and PAP failure is triggered only if the system is programmed as collective and if there is a
p-
w
w

ft

reservation active.
n

.u

.c
li
w

The fault is generated regardless of the type of installation (collective or single automatic call) if the AP output remains
.c

p-

ft
w

active for a time longer than the value setted at address 21.
ft

li
w
.u

7.3MAXIMUM TRAVEL
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

TMC is the maximum travel (run) time; this is the time within the car can reach one floor. TMC is programmable from
.c

p-

ft
w

10 to 99 seconds at add.22.
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

 If TMC < 10 MAXIMUM TRAVEL TIME = DEFAULT VALUE

ft
n

.u
li
w

 If TMC > 80 MAXIMUM TRAVEL TIME = 80sec. +(TMC – 80) tenth * 10 DEFAULT VALUE
.u

.c

p-

w
w

 If TMC = 99 MAXIMUM TRAVEL TIME = infinite

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

It’s enough to program a time for one travel of only one floor becouse this timer is resetted in stop zone and when
w

li
w
.u

entering or leaving the slowing down zone. Over this maximum time, the control board generates one of the following
.c

p-
w
w

faults depending on the situation in which is the car the timer has expired:
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

46
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 Alarm 76: Maximum travel time for floor approaching in up direction expired;

w
lif

.u
 Alarm 77: Maximum travel time for floor approaching in down direction expired;

.c

w
p-


t
Alarm 78: Maximum travel time for high speed in up direction expired ;

lif
n

w
 Alarm 79: Maximum travel time for high speed in down direction expired;

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
After the occurrence of one of this alarms the system is not blocked and you can retry. If the maximum travel time espires

w
.u

.c
-li
w
for two consecutives times than the system enter in permanent halt signalling the ‘80’ fault code. The HALT can be

w
w

ft
w

p
immediate (‘4’ or ‘12’ at add. 5) or it can happen after the return operation at landing ‘0’ (P0) (programming ‘0’ or ‘8’

-li
w
.u

.c
at add. 5).

p
w

ft

n
Plant can be unlocked only pressing SPEEDY on the programming keypad DISP900 or entering in INSPECTION
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

SERVICE mode.

ft
w

p
ft

n
During EMERGENCY and INSPECTION SERVICE operations this timer is disabled.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

7.4RUN DIRECTION

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

RD and RS inputs are used also for run direction control.

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

If the car, leaving from a point out of the synchronizing sensors (an intermediate floor), moves toward opposite direction

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

of the one commanded, when it reaches synchronising sensor is halted (only if immediate halt is activated programming

p
w

ft
‘4’ or ‘12’ at add. 5) and control board shows ‘84’ fault code. The control board knows that car is moving in the
p

.u
-li
w
.u

opposite direction becouse after TD activation the car reaches RS phasing sensor or , after TS activation car reaches RD.
t.c

w
w

p
If car is already in a synchronizing sensor and leaves in a wrong run direction, it goes in overrun signalling the ‘81’
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

fault.

p
7.5MOVABLE PLATFORM
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

There are three inputs for movable platform control:

w
f
cn

.u
 CCO: busy car contact

t.c
-li
w

w
w
 CCC: full load contact
w

f
n

-li
 CCS: overload contact w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

The contacts presence has to be programmed at add. 63, whereas if it is necessary CCC connection directly with the
t.c

w
w
control board, even if there is a serial wiring, need to program ‘+16’ at add. 38.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

CCS is programmable open active (normally close) setting ‘+32’ at the add. 62, otherwise CCS is close active
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

(normally open).

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
 CCO:
w

f
n

-li
w
f

 SINGLE CALL PLANTS: when CCO is close, opening doors is activated and plant is busy and do not allow
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

to make landing calls through CE contact.

p

f
n

.u
 COLLECTIVE PLANTS: when CCO is open, plant receives one only car call at time (cancel any last internal
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

reservations)
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

 CCC:
w

p
w

ft
w

 SINGLE CALL PLANTS: when CCC is enable, doors open is activated and car is busy up to load is full
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

 COLLECTIVE PLANTS: when CCC is close, landing calls are not sent but they are stored and will be send
p-

w
w
w

ft

when CCC will be open w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

 CCS:
w

ft
w

 SINGLE CALL PLANTS: when CCS is enable, plant is kept halted with open doors and SNR alarm signal is
li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

activated. Call is deleted. CCS is not considered outdoor zone and during travel.
w

ft

w
n

.u

 COLLECTIVE PLANTS: in the case of SIMPLIFIED COLLECTIVE PLANT (add. 14, ‘16’ or ‘48’), when
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

CCS is activated, the lift works like in a single automatic push button plant and all reservation are deleted;
w
ift

otherwise, in a standard collective plants (add. 14, ‘0’ or ‘32’), when CCS is activated, it keeps the lift halted
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

with opened doors, SNR ringing is activated and reservations are not cancelled.
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

This three signals’ control is disabled during car travel. (these signals work only when the car is stopped at landing).
w

ft
w
ft

li

7.6ENGINE TEMPERATURE
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

To control engine temperature, it is necessary to connect at TM board input:

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

 PTC probe programming parameter ‘+2’ at add. 62.

w

ft

li
w
.u

If analogic value in input is higher than wanted limit (resistance thermometry > 4K Ω), plant goes in permanent
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

halt with ‘56’ fault. Unlocking is possible only if TM input measures a resistance thermometry < 1,5K Ω
n

.u
li
w

 A normally open contact, connected to temperature sensor (NOT PTC probe), programming the value ‘+2’ at
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

add. 62.
n

w
.u

If temperature sensors are on, engine is automatically halted, safety circuits’power supply is cut off (EXC open) and
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

TM contact is close.
n

li
w

Plant is halted with ‘56’ fault, this fault is permanent only during EMERGENCY mode.
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

47
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 Temperature control engine(TM) in maintenance:

w
lif

.u
Is activated if there is “4”or “12” at the address 5 (immediate block).

.c

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
o The fault blocks the elevator to the next restart from the activation TM (in order to allow completion of the

.u

.c

p-

w
w
run).

ft

w
.u
o

.c
The fault is excluded for 5 seconds from activation of the maintenance (to allow a restart also after the

-li
w

w
w

ft
intervention of the fault).
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
Plant is halted with ‘56’ fault, this fault is permanent only during EMERGENCY mode.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
7.7DOORS ZONE

.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
Doors zone is the hoistway space where doors can open.

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
This zone is always enable in stop zone (IF in ICV/IF layout or in IF-ICV superinposition in DA/DB layout).
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
In IF/ICV layout, doors zone is disabled when car crosses stop zone and starts a regular service, otherwise, in DA/DB

.u

.c
-li
w

w
layout is deactivated when leaves IF and ICV magnetic sensors.

p
w

ft
p

If APA input is activated programming ‘+8’ at add. 62, doors zone is activated in advance when APA signal is present

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
simultaneously with IF or ICV.
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

48
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
8.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
SIGNALLING

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
8.1POSITION /ARRIVAL /RESERVATION

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
8.1.1 Position Signalling

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
DECIMAL VALUE POSITION
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
Decimal value position indicator shows always the floor number

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

 In Parlallel system: indication is provided from I/O 0-23 (only single call plants) or from DEC16 board.

p
w

ft

n
 In Serial system, these indication are available on VEG0400 and SERCAR_LCD (car serial boards)
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
BINARY POSITION

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
Bynary code position signalling (floor only) is provided from A, B, C, D and SCP binary outputs. For the position it is

p
w

ft
p

necessary to set at the add. 8,the values ‘1’ or ‘3’, only if car calls are connected locally (‘+2’ add. 61).Ref.paragraph 2.5
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

Connecting ABCD to the auxiliary board DEC16 you can decode the position indication of first ten stops from binary

w
w

p
w

w
code to decimal code. The programmed underground levels number has not effects on these outputs (e.g. if the car is in
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

the lower extreme landing ‘-2’, DEC16 will turn on lower lights).

p
w
w

f
ABCD outputs can be negated programming ‘32’ at add. 61.
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

NOTE:

w
w

p
w

n
In the event that the number of floor (ind. 32) is> 16 the output “SCP” is used for binary code.

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
ON = output active (Output closed to GND)

w
w

f
n

OFF = output inactive(Output open)

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
Address 61
f
n

.u

t.c
SCP(E) D C B A
-li
w
t.c

w
(+32) (+0)

w
w

f
n

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 31

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 1 30

w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 2 29

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
OFF OFF OFF ON ON 3 28
w

f
n

-li
w
f

OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 4 27

.u

t.c
-li

w
OFF OFF ON OFF ON 5 26

p
w
p

f
n

.u
OFF OFF ON ON OFF 6 25
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

OFF OFF ON ON ON 7 24
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 8 23

.c
-li
w

p
w

OFF ON OFF OFF ON 9 22

ft
w

.u
li
w

OFF ON OFF ON OFF 10 21

.u

.c

p-

w
w

OFF ON OFF ON ON 11 20
w

ft

w
.u

.c

OFF ON ON OFF OFF 12 19

li
w

w
p-

ft
w

OFF ON ON OFF ON 13 18
n

li
w
.u

OFF ON ON ON OFF 14 17
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

OFF ON ON ON ON 15 16
n

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 16 15

.c

w
p-

ft
w

ON OFF OFF OFF ON 17 14

ift

li
w
.u

.c

ON OFF OFF ON OFF 18 13

p-
w
w

ft

ON OFF OFF ON ON 19 12
n

.u

.c
li
w

ON OFF ON OFF OFF 20 11

.c

p-

ft
w
ft

ON OFF ON OFF ON 21 10
n

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

ON OFF ON ON OFF 22 9
w
p-

ft

ON OFF ON ON ON 23 8
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

ON ON OFF OFF OFF 24 7

p-

ft
w
w

ft

ON ON OFF OFF ON 25 6
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

ON ON OFF ON OFF 26 5
w
p-

ft
n

ON ON OFF ON ON 27 4
.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ON ON ON OFF OFF 28 3
w
w
w

ft

ON ON ON OFF ON 29 2
.u

.c
li
w

ON ON ON ON OFF 30 1
p-

ft
w

ON ON ON ON ON 31 0
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

49
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
DIGITAL position (7 segments plus sign “-“)

w
lif

.u
The digital position signal (7 segments with sign “-“) is available, set the value '+48' at address

.c

w
p-

t
61, used the same outputs for the decoded one pole fore floor (P0.. P7). Ref. paragraph 2.5. and chapter 10.

lif
n

w
The correspondence between the mapping one pole for floor and 7 segment mapping is shown in the table below.

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
TABLE w

w
w

ft
w
Fram one pole for floor to 7 segments

-li
w
.u
1 POLE FOR

.c
7 SEGMENTS

w
a

p
w
FLOOR

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
P0 aw
.c

f b

ft
w
P1 b

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
P2 c
-li

p
g(-)

ft
g

n
P3 d
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

P4 e
.c

ft
w

p
w

P5 f
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

P6 g e c

p
w

ft
p

P7 g(-)
n

.u
-li
w
.u

… …
t.c

w
w
d

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
GRAY CODE POSITION: w
.u

t.c

w
w
Gray code position signalling (floor only) is provided from A, B, C, D and SCP . For the position it is necessary to set

p
w

w
f

at the add. 8, the values ‘1’ or ‘3’, only if car calls are connected locally (‘+2’ add. 61).Ref.paragraph 2.5
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
For active this coding it’s need programming the value ‘+16’ and “+32” at add. 61.

w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
ON = Uscita Attiva (GND)

p
w

n
f
n

.u
OFF = Uscita Disattiva (Aperta)

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
Parametro 61(“+16 “ ”+32”)
w

SCP(E) D C B A
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0

-li

p
w

n
OFF OFF OFF ON ON 1
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 2

t.c

w
w

f
OFF OFF ON ON OFF 3
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

OFF OFF ON ON ON 4
w

p
w
p

OFF OFF ON OFF ON 5

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 6

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

OFF ON ON OFF OFF 7

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

OFF ON ON OFF ON 8
w

p
w

ft
w

OFF 9
n

ON ON ON ON

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

OFF ON ON ON OFF 10

w
w
w

ft

OFF ON OFF ON OFF 11 w

.u

.c
li
w

w
OFF ON OFF ON ON 12
p-

ft
w

OFF ON OFF OFF ON 13

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 14
w
w

ft

w
n

OFF OFF OFF 15

.u

ON ON
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ON ON OFF OFF ON 16
w

ft
w
ift

li
w

ON ON OFF ON ON 17
.u

.c

p-
w

ON ON OFF ON OFF 18
w

ft

n
n

.u

ON ON ON ON OFF 19
.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft

ON ON ON ON ON 20
w
ft

li
w
.u

ON ON ON OFF ON 21
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ON ON ON OFF OFF 22
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

ON OFF ON OFF OFF 23

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

ON OFF ON OFF ON 24
w

ft

li
w
.u

OFF 25
.c

ON ON ON ON
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

ON OFF ON ON OFF 26
n

.u
li
w
.u

ON OFF OFF ON OFF 27

.c

p-

w
w
w

ON OFF OFF ON ON 28
ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

ON OFF OFF OFF ON 29

w
p-

ft
w

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 30

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

50
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
8.1.2 Underground Floors

w
lif

.u

.c
At add. 33 (NS) is possible to program what value visualize on the display when there are underground levels.

w
p-

t
Underground floors number has effect only on the serial displays (car and floors).

lif
n

w
.u

.c
In the following table are resumed the values visualized from display at the lowest floor depending on value programmed

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
at add. 33 (NS).

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w
“UNDERGROUND FLOORS” TABLE

-li
w
.u

.c
NS Number displayed at floor 0

p
w

ft

n
0 0
n

.u

.c
-li
1 -9 w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
2 -8

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

3 -7

p
w

ft

n
p

4 -6
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

5 -5

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
6 -4

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

7 -3

p
w

ft
p

.u
8 -2

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
9 -1
w

p
w

w
f

10 0

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
11 1

p
w
w

f
n

.u
12 2

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
13 3

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
14 4

t.c
-li
w

w
w
15 5
w

f
n

-li
16 6 w
.u

t.c

w
17 7

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
18 8
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

19 9
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

20 10
t.c
-li

p
… …
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

8.1.3 Arrival Signalling

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

In parallel mode, arrival signalling can be supplied in parallel plant from 0-23 connectors (only single call plant) or
w

p
w
p

from the ABCD binary outputs. Arrival on ABCD is available only if the car calls are connected locally (‘+2’ at the add.
f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

61) and programming at the add. 8 the value ‘0’ or ‘2’. Ref. paragraph 2.5.

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

Arrival signalling can be supplied also from car and landing serial expansion boards VEG0400, SERCAR_LCD,

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

FLOORDIS, VEG800 etc. (Ref paragraph 2.5, 10.1 and 10.2)

w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

8.1.4 Reservation Signalling

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

In parallel mode, reservation signalling can be supplied from 0-23 connectors or from car and landing serial expansion
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

boards VEG0400, SERCAR_LCD, FLOORDIS VEG800 etc. (Ref paragraph 2.5, 10.1 and 10.2).
w

8.2DIRECTION
li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

FS/FD outputs on the control board give run direction indication if it is programmed ‘0’ or ‘32’ at add. 14. w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

The arrow lights ON after the first call and it turns OFF after last stop in the same direction. It never turns OFF on
ft
w
ift

li
w

intermediate stops.
.u

.c

p-
w

There are 3 different situations during speed change of last stop:

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

1. if there was a landing call for opposite direction, when speed change happens, current arrow turns OFF and a new
ft
w
ft

li
w

arrow turns ON (not important if there is or not a car call). If within TAP (add. 16) time a next car call is not
.u

.c
li

p-
w

commanded, the new arrow turns OFF;

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

2. if there was a landing call for the same direction, current arrow remains ON. If within TAP (add. 16) time a next car
.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

call is not commanded, the new arrow turns OFF;

n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

3. if both external calls are made at that floor, current arrow remains ON up to TAP (add. 16) waiting end, after that an
p-

ft
n

.u

other arrow turns ON. If within TAP (add. 16) time a next car call is not commanded, the new arrow turns OFF;
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

8.2.1 Next arrow direction

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

The next direction of the arrow is use for reserved plants in particular in plants duplex, triplex and quadruplex.
n

li
w

 The display of the arrow only appears on the floor where he stopped the car.
.u

.c

p-
w

 Turns on at the beginning of the slowdown and turns off at the end of the closing doors of the
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

next departure.
p-

ft
w

51
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u
It’s possible to have this signalling in 2 ways:

.c

w
p-
• In parallel

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-
through external circuitry (see diagram below)

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w +
Next direction

w
w

ft
w
floor n°

-li
w
Legend:

.u

.c
FS= Up arrow

p
w

ft

n
FD= Down arrow
n

.u

.c
RFS= Relay up arrow

-li
w +
.c

RFD= relay down arrow

ft
w

p
ft

KG= Relay hight speed

-li
w
.u
P0,P1,Pn°=Position n°

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
Next direction

.c
-li
w +
.u

.c

floor 1

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

+
t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Next direction

p
w
w

CAR
p

f
floor 0
n

.u
-li
w +
.u

t.c

w
w

p
KG
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
RFS
n

-li
w
.u

+
t.c

A1 A1
w

p
w

1N4007

1N4007

n
RFS RFD RFD
f

FS FD
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

A2 A2
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

P0 P1 Pn°
f

FS FD +12
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

Position floor n°
Position floor 0

Position floor 1

w
w

f
n

-li
CONTROL BOARD w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

 In serial:
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
You can activate the next direction of the arrow in the display serial:
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
ICARO_DSR_D00
w
w

ft

LCD650-A: Appropriate programming menu 1 and 5 of the display: w

.u

.c
li
w

w
Set the number of floor for each display (32 = function off)
p-

ft
w

menu 1, and activate the next direction to menu 5 (YES 5 =menu)

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
For more information on programming see manual display LCD600/601
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

LCD600 / LCD601: appropriate programming menu 1 and 5 of the display:

li
w
.u

.c

p-

Set the number of floor for each display (32 = function off)
w
w

ft

menu 1, and activate the next direction to menu 5 (YES 5 =menu)

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

For more information on programming see

w

ft
w
ft

Manual display LCD600/601

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

LCD4001: It’s possible to program the floor where the display is mounted by means of dip-
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

switch.Off, Off, Off, Off, Off, On = First floor). To active the arrow next direction you need to set the
w
w
w

ft

dip switch 6 oN.

w
.u

.c
li
w

LCD550-A: Appropriate programming menu 1 of the display

p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

52
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
VEG800 (dip switch) / ITF801

w
lif

.u
It can be connected to the outputs of a bright Veg800 (version with the dip-switch) or ITF801 to operate the arrow next

.c

w
p-

t
direction.

lif
n

w
If you also use the calls to the plans must need another serial VEG800/ITF800

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
Program the on-floor or ITF800 Veg800 serial devices (see Section 9.4 for programming)

-li
w

w
w

ft
The ITF801 always work as arrow next direction, you just program the floor,
w

-li
w
on VEG800 you can enable this feature by configuring the number of floor with the DIP-switch with

.u

.c

p
6 = ON. See diagram below.

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
- Veg 800(with jumper)
.c

Control board

ft
w

p
-Veg 800 (with dip-switch)
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

-ITF800

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
20 CEX
DIP SWITCH

-li
w
.u
CL

.c
20
-li
w

w
L1 KE Es.Floor 1

p
w

ft
p

1 CL
n

.u
1=ON

-li
w
.u

.c

w
w
CEX

p
20 DIP- switch
w

w
lif

CL ON 20

.u
p-n°

t.c
w

L0 KE

p
1 2 3 4 5 6

w
0 CL
w

FLOOR

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

20 CEX

w
DIP SWITCH

w
CL 20
w

f
n

L1 KE Es. Floor 1

-li
w
.u

t.c

1 CL
1,6= ON Active the next arrow
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
CEX directione mode at floor 1

t.c
20 DIP- switch
-li
w
t.c

w
CL ON 20

w
w

KE
p

L0

f
n

-li
1 2 3 4 5 6
w
f

0 CL
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

-Veg800(with dip-switch)/ Next serial

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

-ITF801 device
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
8.3CAR LIGHTING
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

There are many way to light the car:

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w


p

light can be always ON

n

.u
li
w
.u


.c

light can turn ON or OFF together with reserved signal. In this case a relay has to be connected to OCC output and
p-

w
w
w

ft

its relay contacts turn ON the car light w

.u

.c
li
w

 light can turn OFF after a time higher than reserved signal time through one of the general TIMER (e.g. using
w
p-

ft
w

TMR3, a relay connected to CPF output to manage the light and with FS3 input activation with reserved signal)
n

li
w
.u

8.4LIGHTS
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

Car and landing lights have many different meaning depending on plant type:
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

 Automatic Single call system

li
w
.u

.c

p-

 Car lights show the ARRIVAL;

w
w

ft

 Down landing lights show the RESERVED SIGNAL;

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

 Up landing lights show the ARRIVAL;

p-

ft
w
ft

 Collective call system

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

 Both car and up/down landing lights show the RESERVATION.

w
p-

ft

 ‘Man Present’ call system

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

 Car lights show the ARRIVAL

p-

ft
w
w

ft

 Down landing lights show the RESERVED signal;

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

 Position shows the presence

w
p-

ft

8.5RESERVED SIGNAL
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

Reserved signal turns ON with following conditions:

w
.u

.c
li
w


p-

after first call

ft
w


li
w

entering in the car (when CCO is close) and even when there are over load or full load
.u

.c

p-


w

during INSPECTION SERVICE mode

w

ft


n

.u

during INTERNAL mode

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

53
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 during control board programming (PRESET enabling)

w
lif

.u
 during plant HALT

.c

w
p-

t
The reserved signal turns OFF after a TOC time (programmable from ‘0’ to ‘99’ tenths of second at add. 24) from the

lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-
end of last service.

w
w
w

ft

n
8.6SKIPPING THE FLOOR INDICATION ON SERIAL DISPLAY

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
In systems where there is a floor with no stops it possible to skip the indication of that floor in the serial display. To

-li
w
.u

.c
enable this function it is necessary to program the number of the floor to skip floor plus 50 (considering always the lower

p
w

ft

n
floor as floor number 0) at address 39 (NPM) and add 1 to the value programmed ad address 33 (NS).For example, if we
n

.u

.c
-li
w
have a system with 6 floors (position from 0 to 5) but without stops at floor 3 (counted always starting from 0), it is
.c

ft
w

p
ft

possible to skip the visualization of the floor position in the serial display, passing from position 2 to 4 in up direction and

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

from position 4 to 2 in down direction, programming the value 53 (3 + 50) at add. 39 and the value 11 (10 + 1) at add. 33.

p
w

ft

n
p

NOTE 1: if this function is enabled it’s not possible use the fire service operation
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

and the firefighters operation.

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
NOTA 2: This function has no effect on the display LCDXX, you can change the
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
characters directly on the display (on the menu).

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

54
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
9.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
OPERATIONS

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
9.1AUTOMATIC RELEVELLING

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
It’s a manoeuvre that permits an accuracy levelling of car when this one is stopped at landing:

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft


n
if IF signal is deactivated while ICV is not yet, TS contactor is activated
n

.u

.c
-li
 w
if ICV signal is deactivated while IF is not yet, TD contactor is activated.
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
If this manoeuvre’s duration is greater then RIP programmable time (add. 30), plant is blocked permanently with fault

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

code ‘82’.

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Relevelling is enabled both with close doors (programming ‘16’at the add. 62 ) and with open doors (CS open)

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

This operation doesn’t carry out if:

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
 w
Plant is blocked for the occurrence of fault ‘82’
.u

t.c

w
w

p
 Plant is blocked for the occurrence of fault ‘83’
w

w
f

.u

t.c

-li
w

Contactor are jammed.

p
w

w

Inspection or Emergency service mode is active.

p

f
n

.u
-li
 w
CS1 input signal kept opened (when safety circuit is enabled, do not programming value ‘+4’ at address 62)
.u

t.c

w
w

p

w

ALT button pushed (then if plant is in overrun fault).

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
 If APA input controls relevelling operations (‘+8’ at add. 62) but it is opened, that is the car is out of relevelling zone.
-li
w

w
w

w

In Programming mode (PRESET mode).

p

f
n

-li
w
9.2EMERGENCY SERVICE MODE
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

It is activated when there is a power cut. It is suited both for rope and hydraulic plants.
t.c

w
w
w

Operation begins when EM input is closed to GND and avoiding the control board power off (wiring a battery to BAT
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

connector). This operation works both in hydraulic plant and in rope plant.
t.c
-li

p
w

There will be the following situations for this operation:

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w


t.c

In inspection service mode it is disabled.

w
w

f

n

It is enabled even in systems without head and pit.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

 Safety inputs must be powered on during the emergency service mode.

w

p
w

 In rope systems, programming the value ‘98’ at address 31, the stop delay (TRIF) is disabled during Emergency
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
Manoeuvre.

w
w

p
w

f
 FS3 change’s control is disabled.
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

 Movable platform is deactivated (CCO).

w

p
w

ft
w


p

car overload (CCS) sensors are deactivated.

n

.u
li
w
.u

 all displays are switched off except for the car’s one.
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

 The Alarms for the serial communications are disabled: Alarm ’62 and Alarm ‘63’. w
.u

.c
li
w

 Synchronising sensors faults are deactivated: fault ‘55’ ‘54’.

w
p-

ft
w

 Run direction control is deactivated: fault ‘84’.

n

li
w
.u


.c

Doors checking are deactivated: fault ‘50’, ‘61’, ‘48’ and ‘49’.

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

 When EM is released, after the car has finished the current action, emergency service mode is disabled. w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

9.2.1 Emergency Service Mode in Hydraulic Plant

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

The operation depends on the value programmed at the add. 43 (PPE).

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

 PPE = 32  the car carry out a synchronising operation excluding sensors controls, goes to the landing 0 until RD
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

synchronising sensors; then it stops and commands the opening of the main entrance for all the busy signal time.
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w


p-

PPE < 32 and PPE < plant’s number of stops:

w

ft

n
n

.u

o If the car is in stop zone, opens the doors;

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

o
ft

If the car is halted at an upper level of PPE, reaches it with a regular stop;
w
w

ft

li
w

o If the car is out of floor, under PPE floor, reaches the lower level and opens the doors.
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

 PPE < 32 and PPE > plant’s number of stops  the car goes down, stops at the nearest floor and opens the doors.
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

Indipending on PPE value, during the emergency service mode, the RE-LEVELLING is always deactivated.
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

9.2.2 Emergency Service Mode in Rope Plant

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

The operation depends on the value programmed at the add. 43 (PPE).

n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

55
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
PPE = 32  the car goes down, stops at the first IF and commands the doors opening for the busy signal time. In

w


w
lif

.u

.c
the rope plants at 2 speed TG is commanded instead TP.

w
p-

t
PPE = 31  will be enabled the emergency operation with the search for the optimum direction of motion. The

lif


w
.u

.c

p-

w
operation is described below:

w
w

ft

w
.u
 If the EM input is activated when the car is moving and the ALT signal is not interrupted, the car continues to

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w
move (until reaches the first floor that meets) in the same direction in which it was already moving;

-li
w
 If the ALT signal is interrupted (this will cause the stop of the car) before the activation of the EM input, the

.u

.c

p
w
control board activates the search for the optimum direction of motion. When the ALT signal comes back, thje

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
control board try to move the car in one of the two directions and at each interruption and return of ALT signal
.c

ft
w
the control board reverses the direction in which attempts to move the car.. To interrupt the ALT signal to search

p
ft

-li
w
.u
for the optimum direction of motion it is necessary to connect a control contact of the emergency device in serie

.c
-li

p
w

ft
s to ALT input. So the ALT input is interrupted if there is an overload of the emergency device (the overload

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
occurs when the car moves in the unfavourable direction).
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Can be programmed a waiting time for a new attempt after the interruption and return of ALT signal. This waiting

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

time is programmable at address 30 (RIP).

p
w

ft
p

If the car never reaches the floor when moving in one direction, the control board stops the operation after a timeout
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

time programmable at address 27 even if the ALT signal was not interrupted, and after the time programmed at

w
w

p
w

n
address 30 makes a new attempt in the opposite direction.

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
 PPE < 31 and PPE < plant’s number of stops:

w
w

f
n

.u
-li
o If the car is in stop zone, opens the doors; w
.u

t.c

w
w
o If the car is halted at an upper level of PPE, reaches it with a regular stop;

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
o If the car is out of floor, under PPE floor, reaches the lower level and opens the doors.

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

 PPE < 31 and PPE > plant’s number of stops  the car goes down, stops at the nearest floor and opens the doors.

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
During the emergency service mode, the synchronising contactors are always deactivated and the low speed is forced.
w

n
f
n

.u
9.3PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

To enable platform management or the “Man Present” call managment, must be programmed the value ‘2’ at address 63

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
and wire separately landing calls and car calls (like a down collective plant) .

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
For the correct working of platform lifts with ‘Man Present’ Mode you must enable the multiplexing of the call’s inputs

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
adding value '+64' at address 61.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

This management includes the following actions:

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

 Car runs only if call button (car or landing ones) is kept pressed
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

 All landing buttons are ignored when car runs for a car call
t.c

t.
w
w

 When car is busy for an external call, other landing calls are ignored until the corresponding call button is pressed. If
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

the current call button is released, car is still reserved for this call until car reserved signal is active, but car stops
w

p
w

ft
w

when the call button is released.

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

The control board is able to manage variations of these operations. In fact, if the third entrance is not enabled (‘0’ at add.

w
w
w

ft

3), INT input signal is the activation command of this service mode in this way: w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

 If INT is always connected to GND: car and landing calls are managed like single call plant’s ones
n

li
w
.u

 If INT is connected to GND when car is not reserved: car calls are served like “man-present” service’s ones and
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

landing calls are served like automatic single call system’s ones. To connect INT to GND when car is not reserved, it
ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

is possible to wire this input to:

.c

w
p-

ft
w

 A “presence in car” sensor (car reserved).

ift

li
w
.u

 A car call button circuit properly configured.

.c

p-
w
w

ft

 To the AP2 output signal, that is, in this condition, active (closed to GND) when plant is not reserved or when
n
n

.u

.c
li
w

landing call is active.

.c

p-

ft
w

 If INT input is always open: car and landing calls are managed like “man-present” service’s ones.
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

9.3.1 Electric Platforms

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft

In case of elevating platform powered by an electric winch controlled by VVVF you need to:
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

 PROGRAM ROPE SYSTEM (address 6)

p-

ft
n

.u

 Programming at address 25 (TST time) a value greather than 70, it is possibile to delay (delay = (TST – 70)
li
w
.u

.c

p-

tenths of a second) the disactivation of contactors (TP output) compared to the commands of the VVVF (TS and
w
w

ft

TD outputs) to allow the ramp for the stop. Otherwise can be used the Stop Delay (TRIF) as for the rope
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

systems. With this functions it is possible to have a soft stop (the stops is completed with the ramp of the VVVF
w

ft
w

even if the call push-button is released).

li
w
.u

.c

p-

 At address 1 it is possibile to choose if you want a one speed system or a two speed system.
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

56
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 MANAGMENT OF THE SAFETY CIRCUIT.

w
lif

.u
 At address 31 program the value ‘98’. So the RU output is used to enable the safety circuit to bypass the locks

.c

w
p-

t
of the external door at the landing. With this set up the timer TMR1 is not available.

lif
n

w
 At address 62 add the value ‘+8’ to enable the APA input. Moreover can be enabled the check of the safety

.u

.c

p-

w
w
circuit on input CS1 adding the value ‘+4’ at address 62.

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
9.4REDUCED HEADROOM AND PIT MANAGMENT.

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
When a building has realization problems related to lack of space or special structural and regulatory constraints, you can
n

.u

.c
-li
w
install special equipment made in accordance with local rules,
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

To perform maintenance in the elevator shaft you need:

w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w


.u

Enter in maintenance working mode (activate the input MAN);

t.c

t.
w
w


w

f
You can move the car with PSM and PDM maintenance buttons
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c


-li
w

Press the Stop button (in the pit or in the head) and insert the safety stakes
w

p
w

ft


w

Carry out any maintenance;

p

.u
li
w


.u

Remove the safety stakes and re-enable the Stop button;

.c

p-

w
w


w

ft

Exit the maintenance mode and enter the "normal". The board will show the code "88";
n

w
.u

.c


li
w

To reset the system press the SPEEDY button for 3 seconds at least
w
p-

ft

9.5PRIORITY CALL
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

A priority call can be made from one of the floors by closing the external key on that floor. You can make a priority call
ft

w
n

.u

from all floors by reusing the same input “INT” used for the “internal mode” and you can activated it following the same
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

paragraph.It is activated if:

ift

li
w

-You program “0” in address 3, otherwise “INT” is the door photodetector for third entrance:
.u

.c

p-
w

-“Man present mode” is not activated by not programming +2 in address 63 throught a proper wiring, as showed in the
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

picture below.
.c

p-

ft
w

After a priority call all previous calls are deleted, the open doors parking with close door activated and every type of
ft

li
w
.u

automatic return is deactivated.

.c
li

p-
w
p-

The first priority call excludes all the others that follow.
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Here is what after a priority call can happened:

.u

.c

p-

ft

 If the car is going in an opposite direction of the first floor where the call has been made and then it moves towards
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

the priority call floor.

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

 If the car is stationary, it immediately moves towards the priority call floor when the car reaches the priority call
w

ft
n

.u
li
w

floor, you can close the internal key and move the car with an internal mode after removing the external key. In this
.u

.c

p-

w
w

way, every other priority call will be ignored.

w

ft

w
.u

NOTE: if the priority mode is from a single floor, you can:

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

1) Use the fire service mode to manage a priority call from 1 floor
w

2) Use the classic “internal mode”

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

57
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u
Control Board

.c
GND CL

w
p-

t
lif
12 13 14 15 16 17 1 3 9 2 8 10 INT

n
5 7 4 6

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w C/ L 0 C/ L 1 C/ L 2 C/ L 3 C/ L 4 C/ L 5 S/ L 0 S/ L 1 S/ L 2 S/ L 3 S/ L 4 D/ L 1 D/ L 2 D/ L 3 D/ L 4 D/ L 5

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL

p
w

ft

n
UP DOWN
n

.u

.c
-li
w INTERNAL CALL CALL CALL
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

UP/DOWN

p
w

ft
p

COLLECTIVE
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

WIRING

w
w

p
w

Key to Key to Key to

n
Internal Key to Key to Key to

w
f

.u
Key floor 0 floor 1 floor 2 floor 3 floor 4 floor 5

t.c
-li
w

w
9.6INTERNAL MODE

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

This operation is enabled closing INT input signal to GND after programming ‘0’ at address 3 and if “man-present”

w
w

p
w

n
service is disabled (not programming ‘+2’ at add. 63).

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
This activation causes these actions:

w
w

f
n

-li
 cancellation of all reservations (car one and landing one); w
.u

t.c

p
 the car remains reserved with open doors;
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
 accept a car calls at a time.
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

9.7MOUNTING OPERATION
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

To enable inspection mode during plant mounting phase, it is necessary to connect RS and RD connectors to GND and to
t.c

w
w

connect the EXC, ALT, CS and CT connectors to manouvre voltage.

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

ùEnter in Inspection service mode and so press the PSM push button to go up or PDM to go down.
t.c
-li

p
w

The car speed in inspection mode will be the one programmed at address 4.
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

NOTE: CAR DO NOT STOP at extreme landing if you keep pressed the push button becouse synchronising sensors are
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

not there.
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

9.8INSPECTION SERVICE MODE

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
Inspection mode is activated when MAN input signal is connected to GND or moving the switch present on the
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
programming keypad DISP900 in MAN position. If the inspection mode is activated through the switch of the
w
w

ft

w
.u

programming keypad, is possible to move the car with the buttons UP (to move the car in up direction) and DW (to move
.c
li
w

w
p-

the car in down direction) of DISP900.

w

ft
w

NOTE: The inspection mode activated through the inspection panel on the roof of the car (activated on MAN Input) is
li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

prioritary compared with the inspection mode activated through the switch of the programming keypad DISP900. So if
w

ft

w
n

.u

the MAN input is active, it is not possibile to move the car in Inspection Mode using the buttons UP and DW of the
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

programming Keypad DISP900.

w

ft
w
ift

li
w

At the address 62 MAN input can be programmed normally closed (‘+1’ => the Inspection Mode is active when the
.u

.c

p-

MAN input is open) or normally open (do not program ‘+1’ => the Inspection Mode is active when the MAN input is
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

closed).
.c
li
w
.c

p-

This type of manoeuvre is carried out in this way:

w

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

 All reservation/calls are cancelled (current e future ones);

.c
li

p-
w
p-

 Car can move only keeping pressed the PDM (down direction run) or PSM (up direction run) button placed on the car
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

roof. Pressing at the same time these two buttons, car is stopped. Buttons are enabled after RITING programmable
.c

p-

ft
w
w

time (add.45) since the car stopping, that is when contactors trip and buttons are released;
ft

li
w
.u

 Door closing is activated after the PDM or PSM pressure if photosensor, PAP, car load complete and ALT signals are
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

inactive. When inspection service is deactivated, doors are opened if car is at the landing.
n

.u
li
w

 Car can run at high speed (‘0’ or ‘2’ at add. 4) or low speed ( ‘1’ or ‘3’at add. 4) and it can stop (also when PDM or
.u

.c

p-

w
w

PSM buttons are pressed) on synchronizing sensors (‘0’ or ‘1’ at add. 4) or at the extreme floor on IF sensor (‘2’ or
w

ft

w
.u

‘3’ at add. 4);

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

 During this service are not active:

w

li
w
.u

.c

 The Alarms for the serial communications: Alarm ’62 and Alarm ‘63’.
p-
w
w

ft

 Maximum car run time;

n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

58
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 High speed, in inspection mode car can move only at running speed V1P;

w
lif

.u
 Resrved car sensor (presence in car sensor or MOVABLE PLATFORM);

.c

w
p-


t
relevelling;

lif
n

w
 emergency service;

.u

.c

p-

w
w
 door pre-opening;

ft

w
.u
 FS3 change’s checking;

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
 At the end of inspection service mode, after the operator had left the car roof and the door had been closed, the car

-li
w
.u

.c
stands until a new call is made (a car call or a landing call).

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
NOTE: If plant has 3 speeds with immediate halt (programming ‘4’ or ‘12’ at add. 5), when the first call is done,

.c
-li
w
.c

w
automatic car call at an extreme landing is activated to avoid wrong floors’ count.

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
9.8.1 Hand operation
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Activating MAN and CCS together, car is moved to the nearest floor in low speed, with PDM/PSM push buttons. Car is

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
stopped even if the push button remains active. Once car is stopped, doors are opened.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

9.9SYNCRONIZING/PHASING

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

After an outage, the system has to synchronize itself, except if car is already at an extreme landing. It is possible to
t.c

w
w

p
choose the extreme landing where to go at add. 19. If there is a car sensor faulty (sensor doesn’t open at extreme
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

landing), plant tries to phase on the opposite extreme landing.

p
w
Phasing can start automatically, that is without pressing any call’s push buttons (‘0’ or ‘4’ at the add. 13) or manually,
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
that is after pressing a call push button (‘8’ or ‘12’ at add. 13). When there are manual doors it is necessary to program
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

even the manual phasing mode.

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
In an hydraulic system, if the car is stopped at landing ‘zero’ out of floor but in RD zone, at power on, car goes up until
-li
w

w
w
it leaves the synchronizing sensor and then it goes back to landing ‘zero’. If you have programmed parking with close
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

doors, doors opening is disabled.

t.c

p
9.10 FIRE SERVICE
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

There are two operating mode: FIRE SERVICE mode and FIREFIGHTERS SERVICE mode.
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

9.10.1 Fire Service Mode

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

This operation is enabled only when parameter at address 39 (NPM) is set at a value < ’32’.
t.c

w
w

f
n

If NPM = 32, fire service mode is always disabled.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

In order to activate this service mode, it is possible use one of these input signals:
w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
 FS3, programming ‘96’, ‘97’ or ‘98’ at address 29 (CHF);
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
 PCP, otherwise (when FS3 is used for other function and if PCP is not used yet for doors closing push button).
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

When this signal is activated:

w

p
w

ft
w

.u

li
w

All calls are cancelled;

.u

.c

p-

w

w

PAP (opening doors push button) remains active;

w

ft

 w
.u

An automatic call to NPM landing (add.39) is done after the end of the call in progress, to avoid sudden car u-
.c
li
w

w
p-

turn.
ft
w


li
w

If with manual doors or a manual command

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

-Open, remain stop at the floor;

w

ft

w
n

.u

-Close, go to designed floor

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-


w

ft

If is used the FS3 input:An elevator that runs from the designated floor, it stops on the first floor as possible,
w
ift

li
w

reverse direction and go without opening the doors to floor designated NPM (add.39).
.u

.c

p-
w

If is used the PCP input: An elevator that runs from the designated floor, complete the run, open and close the
w

ft

n
n

.u

doors and go to floor designed NPN (add.39).

.c
li
w
.c

p-


w

ft

With FS3 input:An elevator in moving in direction of the designated floor ,continues without stopping, until at
w
ft

li
w

floor designed.
.u

.c
li

p-
w

With PCP input: An elevator in moving in direction of the designated floor , complete the run, open and close the
p-

ft

n
n

.u

doors and go to floor designed NPN (add.39).

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-


w

ft

If you block the intervention of a safety device, remain blocked.

w
w

ft


li
w

When the car arrives to the designated floor, must remain in parking with automatic
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

doors open and be removed from the normal working;

w

ft
n

.u

 The manual doors must be unlocked and the elevator must be removed rom the normal working.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

9.10.2 Firefighters Service Mode (EN 81-70)

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

To enable firefighters service mode CHF parameter (add.29) has to be programmed with ‘96’ value.
n

li
w
.u

This operation is enabled only when parameter at address 39 (NPM) is set at a value < ’32’.
.c

p-
w

If NPM = 32 or CHF is different from ‘96’, firefighters service mode is always disabled.
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

59
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
In accordance with EN 81 –72 July 2003 – 72 part STANDARDS, this operation is divided into 2 phases: the first one

w
lif

.u
guarantees the shorter time for the car to reach the NPM floor (in case of FIRE) to be used from firefighters; the second

.c

w
p-

t
one manages the car when car is under firefighters control.

lif
n

w
Setting CHF = ‘96’:

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
 Activation of forced closing and alarm horn on CPF output.

w
.u

.c
-li
w
 FS3 is used like Phase 1 activation command: ‘priority recall for the firefighters lift’. (fire service mode)

w
w

ft
w

p
 FS3 + INT are used like Phase 2 activation commands: ‘use of the lift under firefighters control’. (firefighters

-li
w
.u

.c
service mode)

p
w

ft

n
 Check of the second key in car with INT input.
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
The operation mode can be resumed with the following points:

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
 Fire service mode is used for Phase 1 to guarantee the priority recall for firefighters landing (in this case is fire-

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
fighting). If car is running in opposite direction in respect to the firefighters floor, it is stopped at first floor that it

-li
w
.u

.c

w
founds, don’t open the doors and then leaves for firefighters landing, otherwise reaches the firefighters landing

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
without intermediate stops.

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
 If the car is standing with open doors at a parking floor different from firefighters floor, or if doors are halted, when
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

firefighters service mode is activated, after 2 minutes that doors remains open, a forced closing will be activated.

w
w

p
w

n
When the door is closed, the car will leave for firefighters landing.

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
 Phase 2, car is under control of firefighters; This phase is activated just at firefighters landing arrival and when INT

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
and CEP (FS3 connector) are active. Phase 2 needs a particular firefighter lift switches management as described
.u

t.c

w
w
below:

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

CEP
INT
w

p
w

n
External switch
f
n

Internal switch Description

.u

t.c
-li
w

(at fire-fighting
t.c

w
(optional in car)

w
w

landing)

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Blocked plant with open doors, if it is

w

p
w

n
up

at
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

0 0 fire-fighting landing. If this situation

w
w

f
n

remains for a time > 5 seconds, plant

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

goes back to the standard mode.

w

p
w
p

0 1 Blocked plant with open doors

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
1 0 Internal mode.

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
Standard fire-fighting mode
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
1 1 (man present doors opening),

p
w

ft
w

.u
closed doors parking
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

If internal key is disabled, system is blocked with open doors , otherwise if this key is set at ‘1’, system works in
.c
li
w

w
p-

compliance with rule, that is with ‘man present’ doors opening.

w

ft
w

li
w

The second key (the one in the car) is optional, so there are system with only one key. In this case will be necessary
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

to connect together FS3 and INT, so 00 and 11 will be the only possible combinations.
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c

Once arrived at desired landing, doors remain closed. Only with a constant pressure of PAP push-button doors are
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

opened, but if the push button is left before the complete doors opening, doors will close. When doors are
w
ift

li
w

completely open, they remains open until a new car’s call is made.
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

Control board
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

GND FS3 INT

.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u

Internal
li
w
.u

.c

key
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

Fireman external
w

ft
w

key (CEP)
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

60
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
9.11 AMENDAMENT A3

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

w
In accordance with EN81-1/2:1998 + A3:2009 and EN81-21 as of January 2012 all new lifts must be equipped

t
lif
n

w
.u
with a safety device to stop unintended car movement away from the landing with the landing door not in the

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft
locked position and the car door not in the closed position.

w
.u

.c
-li
w
 Rope elevator (Programming “0” or “32” at address 6)

w
w

ft
w

p
A3 Function is active programming “+64” at address 63

-li
w
.u

.c
Application diagram

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c AUX1
-li

BRAKE-MICRO 1

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
Control board

.c
-li
w BRAKE-MICRO 2
.u

AUX2
.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

GND

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w

w
The correct control of the brakes is done by connecting a normally closed contact of the brakes on the

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

inputs AUX1, AUX2.

p
w

w

Both inputs must be closed with elevator stopped, while both are open when it moves.

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u


t.c

The control use programmable delays at address “45” (on inputs AUX1, AUX2) and at address “44” (delay

w
w

p
w

w
f

on the control of the brakes after the start or stop).

cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w


w
If the contacts of the brakes don't open on the run, the fault is generated only after the stop.
w

f
n

-li
 w
If, after the stop, both brakes don’t close, the opening of doors is no enabled.
.u

t.c

p

w

The fault is different for the two brakes: “86 failure for the brake connected at input AUX1 and “87” failure

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

for the brake connected at input “AUX 2”.

t.c

w
w
w

f

n

To unlock the system, hold SPEEDY push-button for a few seconds.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

STARTUP AND SEMESTRAL CHECK PROCEDURE

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

 1- with stop lift

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
x
-li
w
.u

AUX1

BRAKE-MICRO 1
t.c

t.
AUX1

BRAKE-MICRO 1

w
w

p
w

f
“FAULT 86"
x
n

BRAKE-MICRO 2
CONTROL CONTROL

-li
w
“FAULT 87"
AUX2
f

.u

BRAKE-MICRO 2
AUX2

.c

BOARD
-li
w

BOARD
w

p
w

ft
w

GND
p

.u
GND
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

1A w
.u

1B
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
1A-Disconnect from the control board the contact MICRO 1 of the brake (AUX1 input) and verify that on the
p-

w
w
w

ft

display of the control board is signaled the fault “86"; w

n

.u

.c
li
w

1B-Disconnect from the control board the contact MICRO 2 of the brake (AUX2 input) and verify that on the
.c

w
p-

ft
w

display of the control board is signaled the fault “87".

ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-


w

2-With moving lift :

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
AUX1

.u

BRAKE-MICRO 1
.c
li

AUX1

p-
w
p-

“FAULT 86"
BRAKE-MICRO 2
w

ft

CONTOL CONTROL
“FAULT 87"
AUX2
n

.u

BOARD
AUX2

BOARD
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
GND
w

ft

GND
n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

2A 2B
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

2A-connect the input relative to the MICRO 1 contact of the brake (AUX1 input) to "GND", move the elevator
.c
li
w

w
p-

and check that on the display of the control board is signaled the fault "86";
w

ft
w

li

2B-connect the input relative to the MICRO 2 contact of the brake (AUX2 Input") to "GND", move the elevator
w
.u

.c

p-

and check that on the display of the control board is signaled the fault “87".
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

61
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 HYDRAULIC LIFT (programming "16" or "48" at the address 6);

w
lif

.u
A3 Function is active programming at the address 63 the value “+64”

.c

w
p-

t
lif
n
IM

w
VM

.u

.c

p-

w
w
CONTROL BOARD

ft

w
.u

.c
TP

-li
w

w
GND TSD TS TD TP VIM D OM

ft
w

n
+

-li
w
.u

.c
VP

p
w
TS KDA3

ft

n
KDA3 TG TD TDA3
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
TD TS TD TP

-li
w
VG VD VDA3

.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
OM

-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

The D output of the control board commands a new contactor, KDA3, that feeds the second descent

p
w

ft
valve. This valve is piloted by the contacts of the new contactor, in series with the contacts of the run main
p

.u
-li
w
.u

contactor controlled by the TP output (such as the normal descent valve ).

t.c

w
w

p
w

The state off of the KDA3 contactor is controlled by the normal TSD input together with the state of

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

normal contactors TD and TS. (as shown on the diagram above)

p
w
• The valve VDA3:
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

o Is disabled when the system is stopped or running upward;

t.c

w
w

p
o Is activated together with the VD valve at every start for a downward run or a down relevelling.
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
• At power on, after rephasing (back at the lowest floor) and after that the busy signal goes off (about 5
-li
w

w
w
w

seconds), the board immediately executes the control of the valve. The control is done only at the lowest floor.
p

f
n

-li
w
• Before enabling the valves, the board checks that the elevator is correctly stopped at the floor and that
.u

t.c

p
w

contacts connected on APG CPP and TSD input are closed (normally closed).

n
f
n

.u

t.c
• First is commanded the descent valve (TD) by controlling the holding of the auxiliary contactor (D), then the
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

board activates the auxiliary contactor (D) by controlling the holding of the descent valve (TD).
p

f
n

-li
w
f

 Control procedure can be ended:

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

o After 10 seconds (Test OK);

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

o At the exit from the floor (Test KO);

t.c

w
w

o Deferring it, if the control board enters in programming mode or fault is active, or with the
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

activation of one or more of the following inputs: EM, EXC, ALT, MAN and PAP.
-li

p
w

• If the check fails (exiting by the stop zone) is rerun after a re-leveling (wait 10 seconds) and, if the check fails
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

again, the board goes to block signaling fault “86” if the check of the TD output fails (when testing the A3
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

auxiliary valve test) or fault 87 if the check of the D output fails (when testing VD descent valve).
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

• Once you have executed correctly and without error the checks of the valves, the test will be disabled for at
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

least 16 hours. After that time, if the elevator is already at the lowest stop level, the test is triggered, otherwise,
p

.u
li
w
.u

after 24 hours is forced a call at the lowest floor and the check is run.
.c

p-

w
w

• To unlock the system hold SPEEDY push-button for a few seconds.

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

STARTUP AND SEMESTRAL CHECK PROCEDURE

n

li
w
.u

1. Turn on and off the power of the control board to start the auto-test;
.c

.
p-

w
w

2. The control board rephases at the lowest floor;

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

3. Make sure that, first the VD valve activates (TD output) and after about 10 seconds the VD valve goes
.c

w
p-

ft
w

off and VDA3 valve activates (D output ).The procedure must be terminated without failure;
ift

li
w
.u

4. Repeat step 1:
.c

p-
w
w

a) On activation of the valve VD (output TD) simulate the failure of VDA3 valve (output D),
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

manually opening the VDA3 valve (causing the exit from the floor zone);
.c

p-

ft
w

b) The elevator will start in down direction, just exiting from the stop zone is executed a re-
ft

li
w
.u

leveling;
.c
li

p-
w
p-

c) Reopen manually VDA3 valve (causing a new exit from the floor zone);
ft

n
n

.u

d) Verify that the control board signals “86” fault;

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

e) The board is blocked, press the SPEEDY for at least 2 seconds to unlock it
w

ft

li
w
.u

5. Repeat step 1.
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

a) On activation of the valve VDA3 (output D) simulate the failure of VD valve (output TD),
ft
n

.u
li
w

manually opening the VD valve (causing the exit from the floor zone).
.u

.c

p-

w
w

b) The elevator will start in down direction, just exiting from the stop zone is executed
w

ft

w
.u

a re-leveling;
.c
li
w

w
p-

c) Reopen manually VD valve;

ft
w

li
w

d) Verify that the control board signals a "fault 87"

.u

.c

p-
w

e) The board is blocked, press the SPEEDY for at least 2 seconds to unlock it.
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

62
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-
10.

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
SERIAL EXPANSIONS

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
10.1 WIRINGS

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
In order to minimize noise and interferences on communication between control board and serial board, it is important to

.u

.c

w
assign the 4 wires of the multipole falt cable as shown in the figure below.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
1 2 3 4 16 1 13 14 15 16
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
K 2 C C

ft
C C 2 K
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
I 0 I L
-li
w

L I 0 I

p
w

ft
p

N
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

OTHERWISE

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

It is also good to keep the wires that carry the power supply and the commands to the door operator on the others side of
w

ft

n
n

.u

the falt cable compared to the wires that carry serial communication, especially in the case of operators doors at 380 Vac.
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft

In these cases (with 380Vac door operators) it is appropriate to take precautions with special filtering to prevent
w
w

ft

li
w

disturbance to the serial communication between the control board and the peripheral boards.
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

63
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
Serial Display

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
TFT 5.7” SERCAR_LCD2.4/ LCD601 ICARO_DSR
w
SERCAR_LCD2.4_03 LCD600 FLOORDIS

n
SERCAR SCREEN

-li
w
.u

.c
LCD4001

p
w

ft

n
Car
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w
TFT 5.7”-TFT210

p
Signalling LCD600-601 Sercar_lcd Lcd4001/Sercar_screen/
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

2.4 Icaro_DSR/Floordis

p
w

ft

n
“FS” “OUT OF SERVICE”
p

OUT OF SERVICE OUT OF SERVICE FS

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

icon icon

ft
w

p
“MA” “MA” “Manuteinance” icon
w

ft

MAINTENANCE MA

-li
w
.u
…

.c
-li
w

GONG gong Gong

p
w

ft
OVERLOAD “Overload” icon “SC”+(Icon+ SC “Overload” icon
p

.u
-li
w buzzer)
.u

t.c

w
“C” … … “Full load” icon
w
Full load

p
w

w
f

“alarm active” icon *“ALARM” … “Alarm active” icon

.u
ALARM ACTIVE

t.c
-li
w

w
“AR” “AR” … “Alarm receive” icon

p
w
ALARM RECEIVE
w

f
n

.u
FIREMAN “P” “P” … “Fireman” icon

-li
w
.u

t.c

“P” “P” … “Riserve” icon

w
PRIORITY CALL
w

p
w

n
…

w
f

EMERGENCY EM+icon EM Emergency light +

cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Overload+ Emergeny icon

w
w

f
n

Buzzer

-li
w
.u

t.c

NOTE: * Scrolling text

w

p
w

n
Floor
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

TFT 5.7”-TFT210
t.c

w
Signalling Sercar lcd_2.4/ LCD4001/ LCD600-601

w
w

f
n

sercar screen Icaro_Dsr/

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Floordis

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
OUT OF SERVICE “F” “F” OUT OF SERVICE “OUT OF SERVICE”

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
icon
w

f
n

“F” “F” “Manuteinance” icon

-li
MAINTENANCE OUT OF SERVICEw
f

.u

t.c
-li

GONG … Only in mode next Only in mode next …

w

p
w
p

direction arrow direction arrow

n

.u
-li
w
.u

“C” “C” “Overload” icon “Overload” icon

t.c

OVERLOAD

t.
w
w

p
w

f
“C” “C” “Overload” icon “Full load” icon
n

Full load

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

ALLARM ACTIVE “A” “A” “alarm active” icon “Alarm active” icon
w

p
w

ft

… … … “Alarm receive” icon

w

ALLARM RECEIVE
p

.u
li
w

“P” “P”
.u

FIREMAN OUT OF SERVICE OUT OF SERVICE

.c

p-

w
w

“P” “P” “P” “Riserve” icon

w

PRIORITY CALL
ft

w
.u

… … …
.c

EMERGENCY Emergency light +

li
w

w
p-

ft

Emergeny icon
w

10.2 CAR’S SERIALS (VEG400, SERCAR_LCD)

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

The car’s serials are board with 24 digital inputs and 24 digital outputs. This boards can be connected on the same serial w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

channel (max 4 boards on the same channel) and can be distinguished assigning to each board a unique address. This
w

ft
w
ift

li

address can be assigned with the opportune bridge on the apposite Jumpers.
w
.u

.c

p-

To the car’s serials is possible to connect both the signals of the calls and the signals for the services. These signals are
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

then sent to the control board through a serial protocol framework.

.c
li
w
.c

p-

The number of serial boards needed to meet a given installation depends on the number of floors of the plant to achieve,
w

ft
w
ft

and on the signals you want to bring to the control board with the serial framework (only the calls’ signals or calls’
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

signals + signals of services):

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

 If the system has a number of stops less than 13, it is possibile to connect all the signals (calls’s one and services’s
p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

one) to one serial board. Ref paragraph 10.1.1 e 10.1.2

.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft


n

.u

If the system has a number of stops greather than 13 can be used two serial board depending on your needs:
li
w
.u

.c

 If you need to use the serial framework only for the car’s calls, only a serial board is needed. Ref paragraph
p-

w
w
w

ft

10.1.3.
.u

.c
li
w

 If you need to use the serial framework for both car’s calls and services’ signals, two serial board are nedeed.
w
p-

ft
w

Ref paragraph 10.1.3.

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

64
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u
10.2.1 Serial Board ITF400

.c

w
p-

t
lif
n
LAYOUT:

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
Diagnostic leds

.u

.c
-li
w Serial connector

w
+12V:=ON, Power on;

ft
w

n
(power supply + clock and data)

-li
w
+Vi:ON=5V internal;

.u

.c

w
KO: ON, shorted outputs (output to “+Vi”);

p
w
+Vi=Power supply 12/24Vdc (+)

ft

n
n

.u
GND=Power supply 12/24Vdc (-) MCU:Flashing slow (1 sec) serial wiring= OK

.c
-li
w
.c

w
CK=Serial clock (internal or external)

ft
Flashing fast, serial wiring incorrect or broken.
w

p
ft

n
DA=Serial data (internal or external)

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
GND
+Vi

.c
-li CK

DA
w
.u

.c

ft
MCU
w

+12V
p

KO
+Vi
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
O0 I0

p
w

ft
p

I1
n

.u
O1

-li
w
.u

t.c

O2 I2

w
w

p
w

n
O3 I3

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

O4 I4

p
w
w

f
I5
n

.u
O5

-li
w
.u

t.c

O6 I6

w
w

p
w

n
O7 I7

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

I8
p

O8

f
n

-li
w
.u

O9 I9
t.c

p
w

O10 I10

n
f
n

.u
OUTPUTS

t.c
I11
-li
w

O11 INPUTS
t.c

w
w
I12
w

O12
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

O13 I13
t.c
-li

p
I14
w

O14

n
up

f
n

.u
I15

t.c
-li
w

O15
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

I16
.u

O16
t.c
-li

w
I17

p
O17
w
p

f
n

.u
O18 I18
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
I19

w
O19
w

p
w

f
n

-li
I20 w
f

O20
.u

t.c
-li
w

w ENT

w
O21 I21

p
p-SEL
w
w

lif
n

.u
O22 I22
w
.u

.c

I23

w
O23
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
Display + push-buttons
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

for the programming

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

Programming address:
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

ADDRESS:
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

0
ft
w
w

ft

SEL
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

SEL
p-

1
ENT
w

1
p-

ADDRESS
w

ENT
ft
n

.u

ASSIGNMENT SEL
li
w
.u

.c

2
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c

SEL
li
w

3
w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

65
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
ITF400 CONNECTION WITH THE CONTROL BOARD (INTERNAL SERIAL):

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
CONTROL BOARD

w
.u

.c
-li
w Internal serial

w
NOTA:

ft
VIM KI GND DIN
w

n
In order to minimize noise and interferences on

-li
w
.u

.c

w
communication between control board and serial

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
board, it is important to assign the 4 wires of the

.c
-li
w
.c

multipole falt cable

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
The GND must pass between the clock and data.

.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
GND
+Vi

DA
CK
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
Example of connection up to 13 stops: ITF400 ADDRESS:

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

GND
p

+Vi

f
n
CK

DA

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

L0 C0
t.c

w
O0 I0
w
w

f
L1 C1
n

-li
O1 w
f

I1
.u

t.c
-li

L2 C2
w

p
O2
w

I2

n
up

C3
n

L3

.u

t.c
-li
w

O3 I3
t.c

w
w

L4 C4
p

f
O4
n

I4

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

L5 C5
O5
w
I5

p
w
p

L6 C6
f
n

.u
O6
-li
w

I6
.u

t.c

t.
L7 C7

w
w

O7
p

I7
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
L8
w

C8
ft
w

O8
p

I8
n

.u
li
w

L9
.u

C9
.c

O9
p-

I9
w
w
w

ft

L10
n

O10 C10/CCC w
I10
.u

.c
li
w

L11 C11/CCC/CM3
w
O11
p-

I11
ft
w

L12 C12/CCC/CM2
li
w

O12
.u

I12
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

CCS
ft

O13
A1
AP3

n
A2

I13 w
n

.u

.c
li
w

O14 MAN
CP3
A1
.c

A2

w
I14
p-

ft
w
ift

CCO
n

O15
AP2
A2
A1

li
w

I15
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

SAR/CP2
n

CM1
.u

.c
li

O16
w

I16
.c

p-

ft

PAP
w

O17
A1

I17
A2
AP
ft

li
w
.u

PSM
.c
li

O18
p-

I18
A1

A2
CP

w
p-

ft

PDM
OCC

O19 I19
A1

A2

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

GONG RS
p-

O20
w

I20
ft
w

-
+
w

ft

li
w

SNR (suoneria) RD
.u

O21 I21
.c
li
w

p-

-
+

ICV
p-

Freccia salita
w

ft

O22 I22
n

.u
li
w

IF
.u

Freccia discesa
O23
.c

I23
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

66
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

n
KI 0 1 2 ………………………………. 23

w
lif

.u

.c
Inputs

w
CONTROL

p-

t
lif
CK

n
BOARD

w
VEG400

.u

.c

p-
DIN DA

w
w
w

ft

w
Outputs

.u

.c
-li
w L0 L1 L2 ……………………………L23

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c
INPUTS

w
NOTES

p
w

ft

n
SINGLE FULL COLLECTIVE
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

AUTOMATIC

ft
Cn = Car call button
w

p
ft

n
Inp. 1entr. 2entr. 3entr. 1entr. 2entr. 3entr.

-li
w
CCS,MAN,CCO,CM1,PAP,PSM,PDM,RS,RD,ICV,IF,

.u

.c
-li

0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0

w
CM2,CM3,CCC = Input signal wired directly to the serial

p
w

ft

n
1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
p

.u
board.

.c
-li
w
.u

2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2
.c

ft
w
3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3

p
w

ft

-li
w
Note1: To enable car call button instead of CCC signal,

.u
4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4

.c
-li
w

w
5 C5 C5 C5 C5 C5 C5 program the parameter at address 38 and wire CCC signal

p
w

ft
p

.u
6 C6 C6 C6 C6 C6 C6 to the control board.

-li
w
.u

t.c

7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7

w
w

p
w

n
8 C8 C8 C8 C8 C8 C8

w
f

Note2:

.u

t.c
-li
w

9 C9 C9 C9 C9 C9 C9

w
In order to reduce complexity and lenght of site work,

p
w
10 C10 C10 C10 C10 C10 CCC/C10
w

f
n

.u
control board reads in parallel some signals:

-li
11 C11 C11 CM3 C11 CCC/C11 CM3 w
.u

t.c

w
12 C12 CM2 CM2 CCC/C12 CM2 CM2 - Calls Cn
w

p
w

w
f

13 CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS - CCC

cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

14 MAN MAN MAN MAN MAN MAN

w
- CCS

w
w

15 CCO CCO CCO CCO CCO CCO

f
n

- MAN

-li
w
.u

16 CM1 CM1 CM1 CM1 CM1 CM1

t.c

- PSM
w

p
w

17 PAP PAP PAP PAP PAP PAP

n
f

- PDM
n

.u
18 PSM PSM PSM PSM PSM PSM

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
- RS

w
19 PDM PDM PDM PDM PDM PDM
w

f
n

20 RS RS RS RS RS RS - RD

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

21 RD RD RD RD RD RD
w

p
w

n
22 ICV ICV ICV ICV ICV ICV
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

23 IF IF IF IF IF IF
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

OUTPUTS
w

p
w

SINGLE AUTOMATIC CALL COLLECTIVE CALL

p

f
n

.u
OUT.
-li
w
.u

t.c

TYPE A TYPE B

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

entrance entrances entrances entrance entrances entrances entrance entrances entrances

w

p
w

ft
w

.u
L0 P0-A0 P0-A0 P0-A0 A0 A0 A0 LC0-A0 LC0-A0 LC0-A0
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
L1 P1-A1 P1-A1 P1-A1 A1 A1 A1 LC1-A1 LC1-A1 LC1-A1
w
w

ft

L2 P2-A2 P2-A2 P2-A2 A2 A2 A2 LC2-A2 LC2-A2 w

LC2-A2
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

L3 P3-A3 P3-A3 P3-A3 A3 A3 A3 LC3-A3 LC3-A3 LC3-A3

w

ft
w

L4 P4-A4 P4-A4 P4-A4 A4 A4 A4 LC4-A4 LC4-A4 LC4-A4

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

L5 P5-A5 P5-A5 P5-A5 A5 A5 A5 LC5-A5 LC5-A5 LC5-A5

w

ft

w
n

.u

L6 P6-A6 P6-A6 P6-A6 A6 A6 A6 LC6-A6 LC6-A6 LC6-A6

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

L7 P7-A7 P7-A7 P7-A7 A7 A7 A7 LC7-A7 LC7-A7 LC7-A7

w
ift

li
w

L8 P8-A8 P8-A8 P8-A8 A8 A8 A8 LC8-A8 LC8-A8 LC8-A8

.u

.c

p-
w

L9 P9-A9 P9-A9 P9-A9 A9 A9 A9 LC9-A9 LC9-A9 LC9-A9

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

L10 P10-A10 P10-A10 P10-A10 A10 A10 A10 LC10-A10 LC10-A10 LC10-A10
.c

p-

ft
w

L11 P11-A11 P11-A11 -- A11 A11 -- LC11-A11 LC11-A11 --

ft

li
w
.u

L12 P12-A12 -- -- A12 -- -- LC12-A12 -- --

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

L13 -- -- AP3 -- -- AP3 -- -- AP3

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

L14 -- -- CP3 -- -- CP3 -- -- CP3

.c

p-

ft
w

L15 -- AP2 AP2 -- AP2 AP2 -- AP2 AP2

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

L16 SAR CP2 CP2 SAR CP2 CP2 SAR CP2 CP2
p-
w
p-

ft

L17 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP1
n

.u
li
w
.u

L18 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1 CP1
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

L19 OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC OCC
w
.u

.c
li
w

L20 GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG GONG
w
p-

ft
w

L21 SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR
n

li
w
.u

.c

L22 FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS
p-
w
w

ft

L23 FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

67
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

n
NOTES

w
lif

.u

.c
Pn = Position at floor n

w
p-

t
lif
An = Arrival at floor n

w
.u
= Car’s reservation at floor n

.c
LCn

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
AP1,CP1,OCC,GONG,SNR,FS,FD,AP2,CP2,AP3,CP3 = Serialized Output signals of the contol panel.

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
NOTE: The serialized output signals of the control panel are always priority respect to the light signalling.

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
N.B. w
.c

ft
w
When it is programmed serial board type A, in both types of plant, arrival landing signalling has to be blinked because it

p
ft

-li
w
.u
is laid on the car position and the calls ones that are fixed lights.

.c
-li

p
w
When it is programmed serial board type B, in single automatic call systems the arrival and position signalling are

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
separated (are on different connectors) then it is possible choose fixed or blinked lights for the arrival signalling
.u

.c

ft
w
(programmable at address 5, FIXED OR BLINKED LIGHT).

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
Fixed Mapping
p

.u
-li
w
.u

As described in the preceding tables, the maximum number of floors that can be managed with car’s serial expansion
t.c

w
w

p
w

n
board is 13 for normal system (with one access), 12 for double access and 11 for systems with 3 entrances.

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Depending on the value programmed at address 61 you can have two types of mapping for the serial outputs: fixed or

p
w
w

dynamic. Not adding the value ‘+0’ at address 61, the serial board works with fixed mapping for the outputs. So if the
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

total number of floors is less then 8, the first free connector is used to signal car position (no particular programming is

w
w

p
w

needed, there is an automatic configuration). So this last management is used when the maximum plant’s floors number

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

is 8 if car has only 1 entrance, 7 landings if it has 2 entrances and 6 if 3 entrances system.

w
w
w

Otherwise, adding the value ‘+16’ at address 60 (NUMCH) the serial board works with fixed mapping for the outputs and
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

there are two fixed mapping depending on the number of stops. If the number of stops is <= 8 you have the position
w

p
w

n
signalled with one pole for floor, if the number of stops is > 8 and <= 12 you have the position signalled with binary
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

code.
t.c

w
w
w

Example of connection up to 8 stops:

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

ITF400 ADDRESS:
w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
GND

-li
w +Vi
.u

CK

DA
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

L0 C0
O0
w
I0

p
w

ft
w

L1 C1
p

O1
n

I1

.u
li
w

L2 C2
.u

.c

O2
p-

I2

w
w

L3 C3
w

ft

O3
n

I3 w
.u

L4 C4
.c
li
w

O4 I4
w
p-

ft

L5 C5
w

O5 I5
n

li
w

L6 C6
.u

O6
.c

.
I6
p-

w
w

L7 C7
O7
w

ft

I7 w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
P0 C8
p-

O8
ft
w

I8
ift

P1 C9
O9
li
1 POLO FOR FLOOR

I9
.u

.c

p-

P2 C10/CCC
O10
w

I10
w

ft

P3
DISPLAY

C11/CCC/CM3
O11
n

.u

I11
.c
li
w

P4 C12/CCC/CM2
.c

O12
p-

I12
w

ft
w

P5
ft

O13 CCS
li
w

I13
.u

.c
li

P6
p-

O14 MAN
w

I14
p-

ft

P7
n

O15 CCO
I15
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

SAR/CP2
CM1
w

ft

O16 I16
n

li
w
.u

PAP
.c
li

O17
w

A1

I17
A2

p-
AP

w
p-

PSM
ft

O18 I18
A1

A2
CP

.u

PDM
li
w
OCC

O19 I19
A1

A2
.u

.c

p-

GONG RS
w

O20 I20
w

ft

-
+

SNR (Alarm sound)

.u

O21 RD
I21
.c
li
w

-
+

UP arrow ICV
p-

O22
w

ft

I22
w

Down arrow
O23 IF
li
w

I23
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

68
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
NOTE 1:

w
lif

.u
-Add value ‘16’ at address 60 (fixed mapping).

.c

w
p-
-Program value ‘1’ or ‘3’ at address 8

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
NOTE: * = same signal as table at previous page.

-li
w

w
w

ft
w
OUTPUTS

-li
w
.u
Ind.60 ‘+16’ Ind.60 ‘+0’

.c
OUTPUT

p
w

ft

n
(Fixed Mapping) (Dynamic Mapping)
n

.u

.c
-li
w The mapping depends on the number of stops (parameter NF)
.c

ft
w

p
ft

Up to 8 Up to 12 Example Example Example Example Example

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

stops stops NF = 2 NF = 3 NF = 4 NF = 5 NF = 7

p
w

ft

n
(NF <= 8) (NF <= 12)
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

L0 * * * * * * *

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
L1 * * * * * * *

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

L2 * * P0 * * * *

p
w

ft
p

L3 * * P1 P0 * * *
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

L4 * * * P1 P0 * *

w
w

p
w

w
L5 * * * P2 P1 P0 *
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
L6 * * * * P2 P1 *

p
w
w

f
n

.u
L7 * * * * P3 P2 P0

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
L8 P0 * * * * P3 P1
w

p
w

w
f
cn

L9 P1 * * * * P4 P2

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
L10 P2 * * * * * P3

w
w

f
n

-li
L11 P3 * * * w * * P4
.u

t.c

w
L12 P4 A * * * * P5

p
w

n
f
n

.u
L13 P5 B * * * * P6

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
L14 P6 C * * * * *
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

L15 P7 D * * * * *
t.c
-li

p
w

L16 * * * * * * *

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

L17 * * * * * * *
t.c

w
w

L18 * * * * * * *
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

L19 * * * * * * *
t.c
-li

p
w

L20 * * * * * * *
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

L21 * * * * * * *
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
L22 * * * * * * *
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

L23 * * * * * * *
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

10.2.2 SERCAR_LCD
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

The serial card SERCAR_LCD has 24 Inputs/Outputs for connecting calls and signals of service, with fast connection
.c
li
w

w
p-

AMP and also has an LCD display. There are no jumpers to set the address in the serial communication, so the card has a
w

ft
w

li

fixed address "0".

w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

69
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n

Nota:
p-
w li .u t.c w

Icon*:
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n AR-
-li w

-Alarm active;
w AR+ f p n
GND
w

-Alarm receive.
AA- w
p-
+12v
w AA+

ALM*

0
L0
li .u t.c w
I0

0
w ft w I11
n w
-li
f .u
L11 w

11
11
p-
GND +12v
.u .c w
+12v
p-
GND
n .u t.c w

1
L1 w li n
I1
p- ft w p w lif

1
Buzzer
Disabling buzzer
.c

PCP
li GND
.u w .u t.c
+12v
ft w n -li

2
L2
.c wI2
p- w f w p n

2
PAP
n li .u t.c w

0
GND
w n

PCP PAP
-li
+12v
ft w p w

3
L3
-li
I3
.u .c w ft w

3
Car push button “11”

1
n .u .c

or extend the number of calls (up to 24 calls):

-li
ft w V.0.9A
0

GND
w f n
11

.c w +12v
p- w p

4
L4

0
2
n li .u t.c w
I4

4
SERCAR_LCD_03_2.4

w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
GND
.c

3
4
.u +12v
w .u .c w
L5
n

5
-li
w
PCP PAP

I5
w f n

5
w
p- w p w

0
4
t.c
GND
li .u w

70
+12v
w w p n -li .u

6
L6
ft w
I6
w p

5
ft

6
ESPANSIONI
.u .c w .u .c
n -li w

SERCAR_LCD_03_2.4
GND
w +12v
w f w p n

0
6
p-
L7
w

7
Car push buttons
w I7
.u t.c w

7
w li n -li .u
ft w

7
.u .c GND
+12v w
p- w ft w

8
L8
p-
EXPANSION

n I8
li .u .c w

8
w
0
8
p- ft w p n w lif
GND
li +12v
.u .c w
L9
t.c

9
w n 9
-li .u
I9
ft w f n

9
.u .c w
p- w

*The connector ALM is only available for the model SERCAR_LCD_03_2.4

p-
GND
n li
0
.u t.c w
+12v
10
w DIN n
L10 GND
w p

10
p- ft w lif
I10 KI t

10
li .u .c+12V w .u .c
ft w POW
n w
-li
f n
SERCAR_LCD_2.4

.c w
p-
.u t.c w p
n w li n w -li
Serial connector

.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
Jumper for

w f n
Enabling call

w
p-
.u t.c w p
w li ft w p n w -li
.u .c w w ft w

To the SERCAR_LCD without expansion can be connected up to 12 calls but there are no input for the service signals.
n w
-li
f .u .c w
n

It is possible the use of some expansion boards designed for several applications. So you can connect the service signals
p-
.u t.c w p w
li ft w p n w -li .u
.c w w ft w p-
n w
-li
f .u .c w
t. w p n w lif
.
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
 SERADP03: this board is supplied with a box so can be mounted on DIN rail and with screw connectors. So this

w
lif

.u
board is suitable to be mounted above the car and to collect and deliver the service signals as Inspection signals and

.c

w
p-
signals for door’s operator etc.

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
 SERADP04: is a little board supplied with AMP connectors and a double-sided adhesive to the back so to occupy a

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
small space and be easily attached to the back of the operating panel of the car. This expansion board is designed to

.c
-li
w

w
collect car’s calls (for system with number of stops greater than 12) which can not be connected directly to

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
SERCAR_LCD board. w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

The Input/Output mapping of the board SERCAR_LCD is the same of the board VEG400 so you should refer to the
t.c

w
w
w

mapping tables for the board VEG400. Ref paragraph 9.1.1.

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

71
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
10.2.3 Using Two Car’s Serial Board

lif
n

w
.u

.c
If the number of stops is greather than 13 and you want the serial connection both for car’s calls (up to 16) and for the

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
service signals, then you need to use two serial expansion board.

w
.u

.c
-li
w
The two serial boards must have two different addresses to work correctly. To SERCAR_LCD can not be assigned an

w
w

ft
w

n
address so it has always the address 0. To VEG0400 can be assigned an address through the apposite jumpers.

-li
w
.u

.c
You connect all the calls and signalling lights to the serial that is assigned the address 0, while to the other serial (that

p
w

ft

n
with address 1) you connect the service signals.
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

NOTE: The second serial board (the one with address 1) can not be required if you want to provide a serial connection

ft
w

p
only for car’s calls (up to 16 calls).
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

0 1 2 .........................................................................23
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Inputs
.c

CK

w
KI

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
CONTROL VEG0400

.u

.c
-li
w

w
BOARD

p
DA

ft
Jp1
p

Add. 0
n

.u
DIN

-li
w Jp2
.u

Outputs
t.c

w
w
L0 L1 L2 ...............................................................L23

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w 0 1 2 .........................................................................23
.u

t.c

w
Inputs
w

p
w

CK

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

VEG0400

w
w
w

DA

f
n

Jp1

-li
w Add.1
.u

t.c

Jp2
Outputs
w

p
w

n
L0 L1 L2 ...............................................................L23
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
In the following tables are reported the Input/Output mappings if two serial board are used (this is the mapping in the
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

worst case).
w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
INPUTS’ TABLE

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

SINGLE AUTOMATIC CALL COLLECTIVE CALL

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

3 ENTRANCES 3 ENTRANCES
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Add.
t.c

t.
w
Inp. Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 1
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

0 C0 C24 C0 C24
w

p
w

ft
w

1 C1 C25 C1 C25
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

2 C2 C26 C2 C26
p-

w
w
w

ft

3 C3 C27 C3 C27 w
.u

.c
li
w

4 C4 C28 C4 C28
w
p-

ft
w

5 C5 C29 C5 C29
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

6 C6 C30 C6 C30

w
w
w

ft

7 C7 C31 C7 C31 w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
8 C8 -- C8 --
p-

ft
w
ift

9 C9 -- C9 --
li
w
.u

.c

p-

10 C10 -- C10 CCC

w
w

ft

n
n

11 C11 CM3 C11 CM3

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

12 C12 CM2 C12 CM2

w

ft
w
ft

li
w

13 C13 CCS C13 CCS

.u

.c
li

p-
w

14 C14 MAN C14 MAN

p-

ft

n
n

.u

15 C15 CCO C15 CCO

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft

16 C16 CM1 C16 CM1

w
w

ft

li
w
.u

17 C17 PAP C17 PAP

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

18 C18 PSM C18 PSM

ft
n

.u
li
w

19 C19 PDM C19 PDM

.u

.c

p-

w
w

20 C20 RS C20 RS
w

ft

w
.u

21 C21 RD C21 RD
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

22 C22 ICV C22 ICV

w

li
w
.u

23 C23 IF C23 IF
.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

72
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
OUTPUTS’ TABLE

w
lif

.u

.c
SINGLE AUTOMATIC CALL COLLECTIVE CALL

w
p-

t
(Up to 32 stops) (Up to 32 stops)

lif
n

w
.u

.c
TYPE A TYPE B

p-

w
w
w

ft

n
3 ENTRANCES 3 ENTRANCES 3 ENTRANCES

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
Output Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 0 Add. 1

ft
w

-li
L0 P0-A0 P24-A24 A0 P8 LC0-A0 LC24-A24

w
.u

.c

w
L1 P1-A1 P25-A25 A1 P9 LC1-A1 LC25-A25

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
L2 P2-A2 P26-A26 A2 P10 LC2-A2 LC26-A26

.c
-li
w
.c

w
L3 P3-A3 P27-A27 A3 P11 LC3-A3 LC27-A27

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
L4 P4-A4 P28-A28 A4 P12 LC4-A4 LC28-A28

.u

.c
-li

w
L5 P5-A5 P29-A29 A5 P13 LC5-A5 LC29-A29

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
L6 P6-A6 P30-A30 A6 P14 LC6-A6 LC30-A30

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
L7 P7-A7 P31-A31 A7 P15 LC7-A7 LC31-A31
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
L8 P8-A8 A A8 A LC8-A8 A

.u

.c
-li
w

p
L9 P9-A9 B A9 B LC9-A9 B

ft
p

.u
-li
L10 P10-A10 C A10 w C LC10-A10 C
.u

t.c

w
w
L11 P11-A11 D A11 D LC11-A11 D

p
w

w
f

.u
L12 P12-A12 E A12 E LC12-A12 E

t.c
-li
w

p
w
L13 P13-A13 AP3 A13 AP3 LC13-A13 AP3
w

f
n

.u
-li
L14 P14-A14 CP3 A14 CP3 w LC14-A14 CP3
.u

t.c

w
w
L15 P15-A15 AP2 A15 AP2 LC15-A15 AP2

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
L16 P16-A16 CP2 P0 CP2 LC16-A16 CP2

t.c
-li
w

w
w
L17 P17-A17 AP1 P1 AP1 LC17-A17 AP1
w

f
n

-li
L18 P18-A18 CP1 w
.u

P2 CP1 LC18-A18 CP1

t.c

p
L19 P19-A19 OCC P3 PDM LC19-A19 OCC
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

L20 P20-A20 GONG P4 RS LC20-A20 GONG

t.c

w
w
w

L21 P21-A21 SNR P5 RD LC21-A21 SNR

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

L22 P22-A22 FS P6 ICV LC22-A22 FS

t.c
-li

p
w

L23 P23-A23 FD P7 IF LC23-A23 FD

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Adding at parameter 60 the value ‘16’ the outputs’ mapping changes as shown in the table below.
t.c

w
w

Outputs L16, L17, L18, L19 of the serial board with address 0 inicate the position with the binary code.

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
OUTPUTS’ TABLE

p
INPUTS
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

COLLECTIVE CALL
.u

t.c

t.
SINGLE AUTOMATIC CALL

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c

TYPE A/ 3 ent. TYPE B/ 3 ent. 3 entrances

-li
w

p
w

ft
w

Inp. Add. 0 Output Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 0 Add. 1

p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

0 C0 L0 P0-A0 --- A0 --- LC0-A0 ---

p-

w
w
w

ft

1 C1 L1 P1-A1 --- A1 --- LC1-A1 --- w

.u

.c
li
w

2 C2 L2 P2-A2 --- A2 --- LC2-A2 ---

w
p-

ft
w

3 C3 L3 P3-A3 --- A3 --- LC3-A3 ---

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
4 C4 L4 P4-A4 --- A4 --- LC4-A4 ---
p-

w
w
w

ft

5 C5 L5 P5-A5 --- A5 --- LC5-A5 --- w

n

.u

.c
li
w

6 C6 L6 P6-A6 --- A6 --- LC6-A6 ---

.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

7 C7 L7 P7-A7 --- A7 --- LC7-A7 ---

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-

8 C8 L8 P8-A8 --- A8 --- LC8-A8 ---

w
w

ft

9 C9 L9 P9-A9 --- A9 --- LC9-A9 ---

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

10 C10 L10 P10-A10 --- A10 --- LC10-A10 ---

p-

ft
w
ft

11 C11 L11 P11-A11 --- A11 --- LC11-A11 ---

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

12 C12 L12 P12-A12 --- A12 --- LC12-A12 ---

w
p-

ft

13 C13 L13 P13-A13 AP3 A13 --- LC13-A13 AP3

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

14 C14 L14 P14-A14 CP3 A14 CP3 LC14-A14 CP3

p-

ft
w
w

ft

15 C15/PCP L15 P15-A15 AP2 A15 AP2 LC15-A15 AP2

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

16 CM1 L16 A CP2 A CP2 A CP2

w
p-

ft

17 PAP L17 B AP1 B AP1 B AP1

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

18 PSM L18 C CP1 C CP1 C CP1

w
w
w

ft

19 PDM L19 D OCC D PDM D OCC

w
.u

.c
li
w

20 RS L20 GONG GONG GONG RS GONG GONG

p-

ft
w

21 RD L21 SNR SNR SNR RD SNR SNR

li
w
.u

.c

p-

22 ICV L22 FS FS FS ICV FS FS

w
w

ft

23 IF L23 FD FD FD IF FD FD
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

73
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
Applications

w
lif

.u

.c
1° CASE – VEG400 + VEG400

w
p-

t
lif
Using 2 VEG400: setup two different address “0” and “1” through the configuration jumper.

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
ITF400 ADRRESS:

.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

GND
+Vi

w
CK

ft
DA
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

L0 C0

w
O0 I0

p
w

ft

n
L1 C1
p

O1 I1
n

.u

.c
-li
w
L2 C2
.u

O2 I2
.c

C3

w
L3

ft
w
O3 I3

p
w

ft

n
L4 C4

-li
w
O4

.u
I4

.c
-li
w

L5 C5
O5

w
I5

p
w

ft
L6 C6
p

O6 I6
n

.u
-li
L7 wO7 C7
.u

I7
t.c

w
w

p
w

n
L8 C8
O8

w
f

I8

.u

t.c
-li
w

L9 C9
O9 I9

p
w
L10 C10
w

O10 I10
p

f
n

.u
L11 C11
O11

-li
w I11
.u

t.c

L12 C12

w
O12 I12
w

p
w

n
L13 C13
O13

w
f

I13
cn

.u
L14

t.c
-li
w

O14 C14
I14

w
L15

w
O15 C15
w

I15
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

L16 C16
O16 I16
w

p
L17
w

C17

n
O17 I17
f
n

.u
L18 C18

t.c
-li
w

O18 I18
t.c

w
L19 C19
O19

w
I19
w

f
L20
n

O20 C20
I20

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

L21
-li

O21 C21
I21
w
L22

p
w

C22

n
O22 I22
up

f
n

L23

.u
C23

t.c
O23
-li
w

I23
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

1
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

ITF400 ADDRESS:
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

GND
+Vi
w

ft

CK

DA

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

L24 C24
ft
w

O0 I0
n

L25 C25
li
w

O1
.u

I1
.c

.
p-

L26 C26

w
O2
w

I2
w

ft

C27
n

L27
O3 I3 w
n

.u

.c
li
w

L28 C28
O4 I4
.c

w
p-

ft

L29 C29
w

O5 I5
ift

L30 C30
li
w

O6
.u

I6
.c

p-

L31 C31
O7
w

I7
w

ft

n
INVERTED BINARY
n

.u

.c
li
w

A O8 I8
.c

p-

w
DISPLAY

ft
w

B O9 I9
ft

CCC
li
w

C O10 I10
.u

.c
li

p-

CM3
D O11 I11
w
p-

ft

E O12 CM2
I12
n

.u

.c
li
w

CCS
.u

O13
A1
AP3
A2
.c

I13
p-

ft
w

O14 MAN
CP3
A1

A2

I14
w

ft

CCO
li
w

O15
AP2
A2
A1

.u

I15
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

SAR/CP2
CM1
O16 I16
n

.u
li
w

PAP
.u

O17
A1

I17
A2
AP
.c

p-

PSM
w

O18 I18
A1

A2
CP
w

ft

PDM
w
OCC

O19 I19
A1

A2

.u

.c
li
w

GONG
O20 RS
I20
w

-
p-

ft
w

SNR (Alarm sound) RD

O21 I21
n

-
+

li
w

UP arrow ICV
.u

O22 I22
.c

p-

Down arrow IF
w

O23 I23
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

74
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
2° CASE – SERCAR_LCD + VEGA400

w
lif

.u
Currently the best solution to extend the calls and to have the service signals is to use a SERCAR_LCD + SERADP04

.c

w
p-
board to collect the car’s calls and use a VEG400 to collect and deliver the service signal.

t
lif
n

w
The address of the SERCAR_LCD board can not be configured and it is fixed to ‘0’. So the address of the VEG400 board

.u

.c

p-

w
w
must be set to ‘1’ through the configuration jumper.

ft

w
.u
In this way all the car’s calls (up to 24) will be connected to the SERCAR_LCD board and all the service signals will be

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
connected to the VEG400 board.
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
 Note A: GONG and OVERLOAD signalling in the SERCAR_LCD.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
When using a single serial board (number of floor <= 13), the outputs’ mapping provides the GONG and SNR

.c
-li
w
.c

w
(overload) signals respectively on outputs L20 – L21. The display mounted on SERCAR_LCD automatically reads

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
these outputs to activate GONG’s bell and the Oveload Alarm. When using two serial boards (number of floors >

.c
-li

w
13) the outputs’ mapping changes. On the serial board with address ‘0’ the outputs L20 and L21 are used to signal

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
the positions of floors P4 and P5. So the GONG’s bell and the overload Alarm will activate when the car reaches the

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
floor 4 and floor 5. To avoid this situation you must jumper the pin 3 and pin 4 of the programming connector as

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
shown in the figure below.

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

SNR (overload) and GONG signals will be no more used in the display.
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

 Note B: PAP and PCP pushbutton on SERCAR_LCD board.

t.c
-li

p
w

When using a single serial board (number of floor <= 13), the inputs’ mapping provides the connection of PCP

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

(Door closing) pushbutton and PAP (Door opening) pushbutton respectively on inputs I15 and I17. The
t.c

w
w

SERCAR_LCD board provides two additional AMP connectors for these signals. This signals are connected in

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

parallel to the input I15 and I17.

-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

When using two serial board (number of floors > 13) these two connectors can not be more used as the inputs’
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

mapping changes. The inputs for PAP signals and PCP signals move on the second serial board, the one with adrress
.c

w
p-

ft

‘1’.
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

75
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
10.3 SERIAL BOARD FOR EXTERNAL CALLS

w
lif

.u

.c

w
These expansion boards are used to collect the floors’ calls and trasmit them through the serial connectin to the control

p-

t
lif
n

w
board. In addition, these cards also provide the light signals for the floors and the alarm signals.

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
10.3.1 Floors’ Serial boards (VEG602, VEG701, FLOORDIS, VEG800,

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w
ITF800,LCD600,LCD601)

-li
w
.u

.c
Inputs/Outputs mapping for floors’ serial boards

p
w

ft

n
This boards have 2 inputs used for the floors’ call pushbuttons and two output used for the floors’ light signal.
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
In the tables below are shown the function of each input and each output. The functions associated to the inputs and to the

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
outputs depend on the operation mode of the system: Single Automatic Call System or Collective Call System.

.u

.c
-li

w
The function of the L1 output depends on the value programmed at address 10 too.

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

INPUTS’ MAPPING

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
Single Automatic Call Collective Call

.u

.c
-li
w

p
Input

ft
p

.u
-li
0 CEx (External Call) w
Dx (Down Reservation)
.u

t.c

w
w
1 -- Sx (Up Reservation)

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
OUTPUTS’ MAPPING

w
w

f
n

.u
-li
Single Automatic Call Collective Call w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
Output
w

w
f
cn

.u
OCC (‘Busy’ light signal)

t.c
-li
w

L0 LDx (Down light signal)

w
w
w

f
n

PRESENT (car at floor light signal) \ LSx (Up light signal) \

-li
w
.u

t.c

SA (‘Alarm Active’ light signal) SA (‘Alarm Active’ light signal)  Programmable function at
w
L1

p
w

n
f
n

.u
address 10

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
NOTE: In the case of universal plant you can decide to use the L1 output as present signal or as an alarm signal (set
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

"0" or "16" at address 10).

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
CONTROL BOARD

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

VIM KE GND DEX

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

VIM KE GND DEX

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
Min. size 0,5mm
w

p
w

f
n

Until to 10 floor

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
ICARO DISPLAY

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

FLOOR 9
w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

CB_VG0017
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

CB_VG0002
n

w
n

.u

VEG800
.c
li
w

CL White
.c

w
p-

ft

KE Yellow
w
ift

20 Brown
li
w
.u

CEX Green
.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c

ICARO DISPLAY
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

FLOOR 0
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

VEG800
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

76
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.c

CEX
.u n w -li .u .c
w p- w f w p n
w

20
li .u t.c w

J4
J3
J2
J1
w w p n -li

BZ1
ft w ft w

KE
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w

CL
w
p-
li .u t.c w w

Serial device
Serial device
w ft w n w
-li
f .u

Next serial device

w

Next serial device

.u .c p-
n w li .u t.c w
p-

KE
w n

20

CL
p- ft w p w lif

CEX
li .u .c w .u t.c
w n -li

Serial connector
PINOUT JP1-JP2
ft p- w f w p n
.c w .u t.c
n w

J3
J4
li

J3
J4
w ft w p n w
-li
Buzzer w
ft
VEG800

.u .c w
Collective

-li .c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
w p
Serial connector
Serial connector

p-

20
CL
.c

20
KE

CL
w

KE
CEX

CEX
t.c

Buzzer
.u w

20
n
CL

20
KE

CL
li

KE
CEX

CEX
w n

Buzzer
-li
ft w p w
Up Push-button and light
Dw Push-button and light

.u .c w .u
ft
.c w
w n w
-li
f w p n w

Power supply (-)

p- w

Power supply (+)

ON
w .u t.c w
ON

External serial data

li

77
w n -li .u

External serial Clock

w p
1
ft w ft w p
.u .c w

2 3
w n -li
2 3
.u .c w

4
p- w f w 4
p n w

5
w

1 2 3 4 5 6
.u t.c w

ON
5

li

6
w ft w n -li .u
6

.c p- w ft w
Type of plant

.u w

1
p-

20
CL
L0

20
.c

CL
L1
n li .u w
0

1
20

w
CL
L0

n
20
CL
L1
floor

p-
.u
ft
.c w p w lif
li w
Jumper for

n -li .u t.c
ft w w f w n

J1

J2
.u .c p-
n w .u t.c w
p-
programming of the

li
J2
J1

w n

Dip switch for

p- ft w p w lif
Single call

setting of the floor

li .u .c w .u .c
ft
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p n
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
Push button and “busy” signal

.u .c w .u .c w
VEG800 jumper version

w n w
-li
f w p n
Present light/SA( Alarm active signal)

p-
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
VEG800 dip-switch version

-li
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
ITF800 Rev.03

w
p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w
Serial Board for landing commands

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w
-4 Led for diagnostics;

w
w

ft
w

p
-Connect up to 2 push buttons and 2 lights or arrows managements;

n
PINOUT JP1-JP2

-li
w
.u

.c
-programmable minigong and beep for push button pressing

w
Serial connector

p
w

ft

n
-Programming with jumper or dip-switch
n

.u

.c
-li
w DEX External serial data
.c

-Power supply 12-24Vdc +/- 10%

ft
w

p
ft

n
-Supply current: 40mA max DEX GND KE GND Power supply (-)

-li
w
.u
VIM

.c
-li

-Extra small 22x60 mm KE External serial Clock

p
w

ft

n
p

VIM Power supply (+)

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
Type of plant

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
Collective w Single call
.u

t.c

w
w

p
J1 Dw Push-button and light Push button and “busy” signal
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

J2 Up Push-button and light Present light/SA( Alarm active signal)

p
w
w

f
n

.u
J3 Serial connector Serial diagnostic:

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
DL1:
w
J4 Serial connector

p
w

w
f
cn

-Slow blinking (1 sec on 1 sec. Off), the display riceve the

.u
DL1 Diagnostic serial

t.c
-li
w

w
w
DL2 Diagnostic serial serial signals correctly.
w

f
n

-li
DL3 Status up push-button w
-Fast blinking= Serial Wiring incorrect or broken, serial
.u

t.c

p
DL4 Status dw push-button disable from control board or board in programming (jumper
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

BZ1 Buzzer insert).

t.c

w
w
w

f
DL2: Slow blinking= run the system (1 sec on and 1 sec off);
n

-li
w
f

Push buttons diagnostic

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

OFF ON
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

DL4

w
w

f
n

-li
DL3 w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Jumper version
w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Jumper per la
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
programmazione
n

-li
w
f

.u

Next serial device

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

Dw Push-button and light

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

DL3 J1
p-

w
w
w

ft

J4 w
.u

.c
li
w

DL1 DL2
w
p-

ft

ON
w

li
w
.u

J3
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

J2
ft

BZ1 DL4 w
n

.u

.c
li
w

UP Push-button and light

.c

w
Serial device
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

Dip switch version

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

Dip switch for

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

programming of
w
p-

ft

n
n

the floor
.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Next serial device

w

ft

Dw Push-button and light

li
w
.u

.c

DL3
li
w

J1
p-
w
p-

ft

J4
n

.u
li
w

DL1 DL2
.u

DIP-switch
.c

p-

ON
w
w

ft

J3
.u

.c
li
w

1 2 3 4 5 6
w
p-

BZ1
w

J2
ft
w

DL4
n

li
w

UP Push-button and light

.u

.c

p-
w

Serial device
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

78
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c

w
Jumper version

p-

t
lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
1) Insert the jumper programming (DL1 LED blinking fast);

w
w

ft

w
.u
2) Press a button (J3 or J4) No. times to the depending floor (first floor 1 pressure):

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
each press of the button, the buzzer sounds a short beep.

-li
w
.u

.c

w
3) Remove the jumper programming to save the address of the floor;

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
4) To verify the programmed address, power cycle the board with jumper.
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
The buzzer will No. beep depending of the stored floor.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
N° Floor N° pressure

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
0 1

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
1 2

.c
-li
w

The version for the next arrow

p
w

ft
2 3
p

.u
direction is available only in the

-li
w
.u

3 4
t.c

w
w

p
w

model ITF801.

n
4 5

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

The buttons for the collection 5 6

p
w
w

f
n

.u
6 7

-li
calls are not handled. w
.u

t.c

w
7 8
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
8 9

t.c
-li
w

w
w
... ...
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

N N+1
t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Dip-switch:
w
Dip switch version
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
6 5 4 3 2 1 FLOOR
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0

t.c

w
w

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 1

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 2

t.c
-li

p
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 3
w

DIP-SWITCH
p

f
n

.u
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 4
-li
w
.u

6=ON
t.c

t.
w
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 5
w

p
w

f
n

-li
You enable the w
f

OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 6

.u

.c
-li
w

w
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 7

p
w

ft

arrow next
w

.u
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 8
li
w
.u

.c

direction*
p-

w
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 9
w
w

ft

OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 10 w

.u

.c
li
w

w
OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 11
p-

ft
w

Note:
n

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 12

li
w
.u

.c

.
*If use also the inputs for the collection
p-

OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 13

w
w
w

ft

of calls you have to use 2 ITF800 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 14 w

n

.u

.c
li
w

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 15
.c

w
opportunely configured.
p-

ft
w
ift

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 16

n

li
w
.u

.c

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 17

p-
w
w

ft

OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 18

n

.u

.c
li
w

OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 19

.c

p-

ft
w

OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 20

ft

li
w
.u

.c

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 21

li

p-
w
p-

ft

OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 22

n

.u

.c
li
w

OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 23
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 24

w

ft

li
w
.u

OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 25

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 26

ft
n

.u
li
w

OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 27
.u

.c

p-

w
w

OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 28

w

ft

w
.u

OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 29
.c
li
w

w
p-

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 30
w

ft
w

OFF ON ON ON ON ON 31
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

79
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
w
LCD600-601 Display Icaro con la raccolta delle chiamate di piano:

w
lif

.u

.c

w
p-

t
LCD600 LCD601

lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

External serial
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

DEX GND KE VIM

.c

ft
w

p
w

LED’S DIAGNOSTIC:
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Push-buttons: At the pression of push button the led

p
w

ft
switch on. L0 (Push-button P0) and L1 (push-button P1)
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

OFF ON

w
w
LED DIAGNOSTIC

p
w

w
L0
f

SERIAL

.u

t.c
-li
w

LCD600

w
L1

p
w
w

DL2

f
n

.u
-li
w Serial diagnostic:
.u

LED
t.c

w
w
DIAGNOSTIC
DL2: Slow blinking= run the system (1 sec on and 1 sec

p
w

n
DL1

w
PUSH- BUTTON
f
cn

.u
off);

t.c
P1
-li
w

w
P0

w
DL1: Slow blinking, the display riceve the serial signals.
w

f
n

-li
w Fast blinking= Serial Wiring incorrect or broken,
.u

L1
t.c

L0
w
or menù 1=32.

p
w

n
SW2 SW1
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
Push-button Push-button

t.c
-li
w

Down reservation
t.c

Up reservation

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION: Collective calls (UP-DW).

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

CONTROL BOARD

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
Serial external

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

DEX GND KE VIM

.c

p-

w
w

NOTE:
w

ft

* The write “NF” (NO FLOOR) is visualize of default.Must be setting a floor at w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

MENU 1. Started of floor 0Menu 1=0

w

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

SW2 SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2 SW1

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

Push-button Push-button Push-button

w

+ + Push-button + + Push-button + + Push-button

w

ft

Up reservation Down reservation Up reservation

w

Up reservation Down reservation Down reservation

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

Floor -1 FLOOR 30
li

FLOOR 0
w
.u

.c

p-

*MENU 1 = 31
w

*MENU 1 = 0 *MENU 1 = 1
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

80
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
t.c

p-

w
10.3.2 Collecting external calls with VEG400

w
lif

.u

.c
The board VEG400 can be used to collect the external calls too. To do this you must connect the VEG400 board to the

w
p-

t
external serial channel as shown in the figure and program the control board adding at address 61 the value ‘+1’.

lif
n

w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u
KE 0 1 2 ........................................................23

.c
-li
w

w
w
Inputs

ft
w

-li
w
Control CK

.u

.c

w
Board DEX VEG400

p
w

ft
DA

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w Outputs
.c

ft
w

p
L0 L1 L2 ..............................................L23
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

As for car calls, when collecting external calls with the VEG400 board, may be necessary two serial board depending on

p
w

ft

n
p

the number of landings:

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
 Less then 12, one serial board is sufficient.
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
 Equal to12, you can use one serial board, but FS and FD signals are not available.

.u

.c
-li
w

p
 More then 12 (up to 16), you must use 2 serial boards. Up to the 12th landing, light signal and call’s pushbuttons are

ft
p

.u
connected to the serial board with address 0; for the other landings, light signals and call’s pushbutton are connected

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
to the second serial board (the one with address 1). The signals for the UP/DOWN direction light arrows (FS,FD) are

p
w

w
f

.u
also connected to the second serial board (address 1).

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
In the tables below is shown the Inputs\Outpus mapping when using the car’s serial board to collect the external calls.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li

INPUTS
w

OUTPUTS

w
w
w

SINGLE CALL COLLECTIVE CALL

p

f
SINGLE AUTOMATIC CALL COLLECTIVE CALL
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

In Add. 0 Add. 1 Add. 0 Add. 1 Out Address 0 Address 1 Address 0 Address 1

w

p
w

n
0 CE0 CE12 D0 D12
f

L0 AD0 AD12 LD0 LD12

n

.u

t.c
-li
w

1 CE0 CE12 S0 S12

t.c

w
L1 AS0 AS12 LS0 LS12

w
w

f
n

2 CE1 CE13 D1 D13 L2 AD1 AD13 LD1 LD13

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

3 CE1 CE13 S1 S13

w
L3 AS1 AS13 LS1 LS13

p
w

n
up

4 CE2 CE14 D2 D14

n

.u
L4 AD2 AD14 LD2 LD14

t.c
-li
w
t.c

5 CE2 CE14 S2 S14

w
L5 AS2 AS14 LS2 LS14
w

f
n

6 CE3 CE15 D3 D15

-li
w
f

L6 AD3 AD15 LD3 LD15

.u

t.c
-li

7 CE3 CE15 S3 S15

w
L7 AS3 AS15 LS3 LS15

p
w
p

f
n

.u
8 CE4 CE16 D4 D16 L8 AD4 AD16 LD4 LD16
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
9 CE4 CE16 S4 S16
w

L9 AS4 AS16 LS4 LS16

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

10 CE5 CE17 D5 D17

.u

L10 AD5 AD17 LD5 LD17

.c
-li
w

w
11 CE5 CE17 S5 S17

p
w

ft

L11 AS5 AS17 LS5 LS17

w

.u
12 CE6 CE18 D6 D18
li
w

L12 AD6 AD18 LD6 LD18

.u

.c

p-

w
w

13 CE6 CE18 S6 S18 L13 AS6 AS18 LS6 LS18

w

ft

w
.u

14 CE7 CE19 D7 D19

.c
li
w

L14 AD7 AD19 LD7 LD19

w
p-

ft

15 CE7 CE19 S7 S19

w

L15 AS7 AS19 LS7 LS19

n

li
w

16 CE8 CE20 D8 D20

.u

L16 AD8 AD20 LD8 LD20

.c

.
p-

w
w

17 CE8 CE20 S8 S20

w

ft

L17 AS8 AS20 LS8 LS20

n

w
n

.u

.c
li

18 CE9
w

CE21 D9 D21 L18 AD9 AD21 LD9 LD21

.c

w
p-

ft
w

19 CE9 CE21 S9 S21 L19 AS9 AS21 LS9 LS21

ift

li
w
.u

20 CE10 CE22 D10 D22

.c

L20 AD10 AD22 LD10 LD22

p-
w
w

ft

21 CE10 CE22 S10 S22

n

L21 AS10 AS22 LS10 LS22

n

.u

.c
li
w

22 CE11 CE23 D11 D23 L22 AD11/FS AD23/FS LD11/FS LD23/FS

.c

p-

ft
w

23 CE11 CE24 S11 S23

ft

L23 AS11/FD AS23/FD LS11/FD LS23/FD

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

NOTES
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

= landing call push button at floor ‘n’ (single automatic call systems)
w

ft

CEn
n

li
w
.u

= call push button to go down at floor ‘n’ (collective call systems)

.c
li
w

Dn
p-
w
p-

ft

Sn = call push button to go up at floor ‘n’ (collective call systems)

n

.u
li
w

= down direction arrival’s light signal at floor ‘n’

.u

ADn
.c

p-

w
w

= up direction arrival’s light signal at floor ‘n’

w

ft

ASn
n

w
.u

.c

= down direction reservation’s light signal at floor ‘n’

li
w

LDn
w
p-

ft

= up direction reservation’ s light signal at floor ‘n’

w

LSn
n

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

NOTE: The address selection of the two car’s serial boards when used to collect the esternal calls, is the
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c

same as when used to collect car’s signals. (Ref. paragraph 10.1.3).

li
w

p-

ft
w

81
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w
Version chronology:

.u t.c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u
V4.3.079…Management gray code

.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
ft w p w w
V4.3.089…Management A3 emendament;

-li .u .c w ft
n -li .u .c
V4.3.062…Addition “input To” Management

ft
.c w p- w f w p n
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w
V4.3.094… Management self-leveling in systems rope;

w n w
-li
f .u .c w
w
p- t.c w p n w
li .u w

82
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u
p
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
….Management systems multiplex with MCU board, disaligned.

w ft w p- n w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
V4.3.039… Management Support new serial displays LCD600-601- TFT5.7”-TFT210;

.u .c w
p-
.u t.c w p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n
w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.